JP2020114517A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing the degree of attention to a play which is in a specific game state.SOLUTION: An MPU 92 of a main controller 71 executes a winning lottery on the basis of the entrance of a game ball into an upper operation hole or lower operation hole disposed in a play area, and shifts the game state to an opening/closing execution mode to allow the game ball to enter variable winning devices disposed in the play area when the result of the winning lottery is a prescribed result. In this case, the variable winning devices operate in a common mode from the starting time in the opening/closing execution mode of when the result of the winning lottery is a special losing result or the opening/closing execution mode of when the result is a high-probability result corresponding to concealed branch. In the former opening/closing execution mode, an interval of the common mode is sometimes shortened on the basis of the occurrence of the entrance into the variable winning device during the operation in the common mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, one provided with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen is known. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operating opening provided in a gaming area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a hit state is generated, and a pattern The variable display of is started. When the lottery is won, the combination of the specific symbols and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state. With the transition to the specific game state, for example, opening and closing of the variable ball entrance device provided in the game area is started.

For example, in more detail about the variable ball-entering device of the pachinko machine shown in Patent Document 1, in a situation where the game is not in a specific game state, the game ball cannot enter or is in a closed state where it is difficult to enter, and the specific game After shifting to the state, the state is switched to the open state a predetermined number of times.

JP, 2005-074175, A

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launching operation by a player,
A variable ball entering means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball control means for executing a variable ball control for switching the variable ball ball to the closed state after the variable ball ball is opened.
A transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Specific control setting means for setting the variable ball entrance control to a specific control state in which the variable ball entry control is performed a predetermined number of times, based on the determination result of the transition determination means corresponding to the transition of the game state. When,
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the composition of the (a) game board, and the vertical sectional view for explaining the (b) variable winning a prize device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of (a)-(j) symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the win/loss table for the high probability mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining a distribution table. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing performed by MPU of the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for rounds performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening/closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the special winning opening opening processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the completion|finish of opening/closing execution mode performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the production determination processing performed by MPU of an audio emission control device. It is a flowchart which shows the production|generation determination process for opening/closing execution modes performed by MPU of a sound emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing which shows the data table of production A1, (b) Explanatory drawing which shows the data table of production A2, (c) It is explanatory drawing which shows the data table of production A3. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various game results. 7 is a timing chart for explaining the contents of each open/close execution mode. (A), (b) Timing chart for explaining the contents of the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disengagement result, (c) The contents of the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by one of the jackpot results 4 is a timing chart for explaining the above. (A) Timing chart for explaining the contents of the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B triggered by the low-probability jackpot result B or the implicit high-probability jackpot result B, (b) the pattern triggered by the explicit high-probability jackpot result B 7 is a timing chart for explaining the contents of a B open/close execution mode. It is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electric configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are installed. (A) A rear view of the pachinko machine showing an external terminal board and its periphery in an enlarged scale, (b) an explanatory view for explaining an external output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control device, and (c) an external terminal board. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric composition. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of mode transfer performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process for a delay performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by MPU of a hall computer. (A) A timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the external output in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern D, and (B) A timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the external output in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A shifted from the low frequency support mode. It is a timing chart. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the external output in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by the fact that the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained. 9 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of external output in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B. (A) A front view showing the configuration of the game board in the second embodiment, (b) a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the first variable winning a prize device, and (c) a longitudinal section for explaining the second variable award winning device. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st allocation table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd allocation table. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the winning processing for the operation mouth performed by MPU of the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening/closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the special winning opening opening processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the completion|finish of opening/closing execution mode performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the production determination processing performed by MPU of an audio emission control device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various game results. 6 is a timing chart for explaining the contents of the open/close execution mode.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in a developed manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

The gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and in a front view, the left side can be turned forward with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation tip side. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and in a front view, the back pack unit 15 is rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its pivoting front end, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 such that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 24, and FIG. 4B is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the variable winning device 32 provided in the game board 24.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In each opening, a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working opening (first starting ball entering section) 33, a lower working opening (second starting ball entering section) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, The main display unit 43, the accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided, respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33 and the lower working opening 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working port 33 and a ball enters the lower working port 34, three prize balls are paid out, and the ball entering the general winning port 31 is When it occurs, the payout of 10 prize balls is executed, and when the incident of the ball into the variable winning device 32 occurs, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls associated with the lower operation port 34 is larger than the number of prize balls associated with the upper operation port 33. It may be different. In addition, the number of prize balls associated with the variable winning device 32 is not limited to a larger number than other prize balls, and may be smaller than the number of prize balls associated with the general winning opening 31, for example.

In addition, an outlet 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through the outlet 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharging from the game area after passing through the opening. The mode which is not performed is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 37, the general prize opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33, the lower working opening 34 or the through gate 35 Entering a game ball is also referred to as winning.

The upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are unitized as a working port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 faces upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 34a is connected to the electric accessory driving unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory driving unit 34b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is placed in either the open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 34a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the lower working port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is opened, the lower operating port 34 can be won.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and a state in which a game ball is easily won into the lower working opening 34 and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur than a state in which a prize is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur are electrically driven. The accessory 34a may be switched. Alternatively, the electric accessory 34a may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a prize is more likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the lower working port 34 itself.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the variable winning a prize device 32 includes a big winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32b for opening and closing the big winning opening 32a. .. The open/close door 32b is connected to a variable winning drive unit 32c integrally provided as the variable winning device 32 (a connecting portion is not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 32c to be in a closed state and an open state. Will be placed in either. Specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state where the game ball cannot be won, and when the internal lottery wins the transition to the open/close execution mode, the game ball is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be won. By the way, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be switched to when a big hit or a special failure occurs. The opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail later.

In addition, the variable winning device 32, the first state in which the winning is impossible or difficult to occur, and the range to be opened in the special winning opening 32a is wider than that in the first state, or the first prize is made easier to enter the big winning opening 32a. The configuration may be such that two states are set.

In the main display portion 43, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 as a trigger, and the result of the stop of the variable display is the winning of the winning in the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. The result of the internal lottery performed based on this is clearly displayed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper working opening 33 and the winning of the lower working opening 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. The result of the selected internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display section 43 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display portion 43. After it is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode.

The main display section 43 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by another type of display device such as a CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality of types are variably displayed. A configuration in which the colors of the seeds are switched and displayed is possible.

In the accessory display unit 44, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is displayed as the stop result of the variable display. It is specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and the variable display is displayed. After the power supply is stopped, the state changes to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variably displaying (or variably displaying or switching displaying) a symbol which is a kind of symbol, and a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41. Has been done. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and dot matrix display. It may be a container.

In the symbol display device 41, the variable display of symbols is started based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display section 43, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 5(a) to 5(j), a design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached and shell-shaped design designs. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by adding numbers "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, 9 types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols.

As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 3×3 nine symbols are stopped and displayed. It is like this. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display screen G.

When an effect for game play is performed on the display screen G based on the winning of the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts at. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game play. Production is finished.

In addition, when the production for game times ends, if it is a game time corresponding to the occurrence of the most advantageous jackpot result described later, a combination of symbols with the same odd number is formed on one of the activated lines. If it is a game time corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined low-probability jackpot result, which will be described later, a combination of symbols having the same even number on any of the activated lines is formed. In addition, if the game number is a result different from these and corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode, a predetermined symbol combination is formed although it is not a symbol combination having the same number. The contents of each game result will be described later.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started on the main display portion 43 and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. It is equivalent to one game.

Further, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a first holding lamp section 45 corresponding to the main display section 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls winning the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 is reserved up to 4, and the reserved quantity is displayed by turning on the first holding lamp part 45.

A second holding lamp section 46 corresponding to the accessory display section 44 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 42. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by turning on the second suspension lamp section 46. The functions of the respective holding lamp units 45 and 46 may be configured to be performed by the display in a partial area of the symbol display device 41.

An inner rail portion 48 and an outer rail portion 49 are attached to the game board 24, and the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49 constitute a guide rail, and the game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and is stored in a launching rail 52 extending toward the guide rail and an upper plate 61a described later. It is provided with a ball feeding device 53 that supplies the game ball onto the launch rail 52, and a solenoid 54 that is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied onto the launch rail 52 toward the guide rail. By operating the firing handle 55 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 54 is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 56 that allows almost the entire game area to be viewed from the front. The window portion 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 57 is fitted therein. The window panel 57 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the gaming area is visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 57. If possible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

Around the window 56, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp portion 58 is provided above the window portion 56 as a part of various lamp portions. Further, speaker units 59 are provided on both left and right sides of the display lamp unit 58 to output a sound effect or the like according to the gaming state.

Below the window portion 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 that bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 61a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging part 61, and a lower plate 62a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging part 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 62a has a function of storing the game balls that are excessive in the upper plate 61a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game, and a control of a sound and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) are provided. A voice light emission control device 72 that controls the device is mounted.

It should be noted that the substrate box 71a of the main control device 71 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Examples of the trace means include a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires a plurality of case bodies that form the substrate box 71a to be inseparably coupled and requires a predetermined portion to be destroyed when the separation is performed, and an adhesive layer to which the adhesive layer is adhered when peeled off. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left in the case is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is conceivable that an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box 71a.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71 and the sound emission control device 72. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and the payout mechanism unit 74 and the control device assembly unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

The payout mechanism unit 74 includes a tank 76 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game arcade are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 77 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 76. The game ball paid out from the payout device 77 is discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 77. The payout mechanism 74 is supplied with a main power of 24 V AC, for example, and is equipped with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power.

The control device gathering unit 75 generates a payment control device 78 having a function of controlling the payment device 77, a predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and outputs the generated power, and a game accompanying the operation of the firing handle 55 by the player. And a launch control device 79 for controlling the launch of the ball. The payout control device 78 and the power supply/firing control device 79 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 78 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 73 is provided with an external terminal board 81 in addition to the payout mechanism section 74 and the control device assembly unit 75. The external terminal board 81 is installed on the back corner of the back pack unit 15 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and in the upper corner portion. The external terminal board 81 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order for the management computer in the game hall to recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the external terminal board 81 will be described later.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitoring board 95 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 which stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory which temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 71.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 92, the power failure monitoring board 95 and the payout controller 78 provided in the main controller 71 are connected. In this case, a power supply and a firing control device 79 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 95, and power is supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 95.

Further, various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 96a to 96e are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are provided one-to-one with respect to the winning-corresponding ball portions such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33, the lower working opening 34, and the through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 92 makes a prize determination (ball determination) to each of the ball entering portions. Further, in the MPU 92, various kinds of lottery are executed based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 and the lower working opening 34.

To the output side of the MPU 92, the power failure monitoring board 95, the payout control device 78 and the sound emission control device 72 are connected. To the payout control device 78, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of the prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball portion. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 72. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 92, a variable winning a prize driving section 32c for opening and closing the opening/closing door 32b of the variable winning a prize device 32, an electric winning object driving section 34b for opening and closing an electric winning object 34a of the lower working opening 34, and a main display section. 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. In addition, when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is won, the MPU 92 controls the drive of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. In addition, at each game time, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 92.

An external terminal board 81 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 sets information according to the progress of the game in the external output buffer 94d provided in the RAM 94. Then, according to the information set in the external output buffer 94d, the setting for signal output is made to the external terminal board 81, and the hall computer HC of the gaming hall is made to recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10. The contents of such setting will be described later.

The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power supply/launch control device 79, and also monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 79. The payout control device 78 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 77 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

The power supply and launch control device 79 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 91, the payout control device 78, and the like are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply and firing control device 79 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, so that even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 71. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 79 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The sound emission control device 72 includes a sound emission control board 101 on which the MPU 102 is mounted. The MPU 102 includes a ROM 103 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 103 is executed. A RAM 104, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are built in. The MPU 102 drives and controls the various lamp units 45, 46, 58 and the speaker unit 59 based on the command received from the main control unit 71, and transmits the command to the display control unit 111.

The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which an MPU 113, which is an element in which a program ROM 114 and a work RAM 115 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 116, a character ROM 117, and a video RAM 118 are mounted. Equipped with.

The MPU 113 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 72 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 116 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 116).

The program ROM 114 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 113 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information. The work RAM 115 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 113 executes various programs, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply when holding the stored information. Is.

The VDP 116 is a kind of drawing circuit for directly operating the image processing device as the liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 116 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 116 adjusts respective timings of the MPU 113, the video RAM 118 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 118 from the character ROM 117 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 117 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 117 holds bit map format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

The video RAM 118 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 118.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in MPU 92 of main controller 71>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 92 uses various counter information at the time of playing a game, and performs jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced. Reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter for determining the display duration time in the main display portion 43 and the pattern display device 41. CS and will be used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operation port 34 is placed in the electric opening state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired in the RAM 94 when a winning is generated in the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a provided as a storage means.

The reserve ball storage area 94a includes a reserve area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and according to the winning history of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. A combination of numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winnings to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 occur successively a plurality of times, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE1. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. Further, the holding area RE is provided with a holding number storage area NA, and in order to specify the number of holding history of winning prizes for the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 in the holding number storage area NA. Information is stored.

Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display portion 43, and at the start of one game time. Is judged on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric reserve area 94c of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in a similar manner to the game area, the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is opened per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or the low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or the high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of is relatively high or low.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the electric role open state wins in the electric role open lottery using the electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric-role open state is won is set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric power open state is won, and in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time required for the next electric auditors product open lottery after one electric auditors game open lottery is performed (that is, The one-time display duration time on the accessory display unit 44 is set to be short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower working opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the upper working opening 33 is higher than in the lower working opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning in the lower working opening 34 is higher than that in the upper working opening 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is paid to the lower working opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he holds. be able to.

In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of being in the electric power open state per unit time in the high frequency support mode is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured such that the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. In addition, a securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (for example, on the accessory display unit 44 based on the winning of the through gate 35). In the configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time is easier to select or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is concerned. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or a condition of any combination of shortening the average time of securing time and increasing the winning probability. ..

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34.

The value of the random number that is a big hit is stored as a win/loss table (win/win information group) in the win/win table storage area 93a as a win/win information group storage unit in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the hit/miss table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, as the win/loss table, the win/fail table for low probability mode (low probability win/win information group) in FIG. 9A and the win/fail table for high probability mode (high) in FIG. 9B. Probability information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode (low-probability state) and the high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery means.

In the game state in which the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9(a), the value of the random number for the jackpot win is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9B, the value of the random number for the jackpot win is 21. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot win in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot win in the high probability mode.

If the probability of winning in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that win the prize are arbitrary, and the jackpot random numbers that win the jackpot in the situation of the low-probability mode. The value group of the counter C1 may or may not include a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation of the high probability mode.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery result will be a result other than the value of the random number that is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, as a result of the miss, a special miss result (small hit result) and a normal miss result Two types are set. Neither the special out-of-range result nor the normal out-of-place result triggers the transition to the winning/failing lottery mode or the support mode, but the special out-of-range result triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the normal out-of-place result switches to the opening/closing execution mode. Is not a trigger for the transition.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 93b as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot result allocation destination is a low-probability jackpot result A (or sudden normal jackpot result), a low-probability jackpot result B (or normal jump-up jackpot result), a low-probability jackpot result C (or normal Jackpot result), implicit high accuracy jackpot result A (or latent probability variation jackpot result), implicit high accuracy jackpot result B (or latency probability variation jump-up jackpot result), explicit high accuracy jackpot result A (or sudden probability jackpot result), The explicit high-probability jackpot result B (or the first hitting jump jump jackpot result), the explicit high-probability jackpot result C (or the second hitting jump-up jackpot result), and the most advantageous jackpot result are set. A jackpot type counter C2 is assigned to each of these jackpot results so as not to overlap each other.

Each of these jackpot results is divided into three contents: (1) contents related to the opening/closing execution mode, (2) contents related to winning/absence lottery mode after completion of the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) contents related to support mode after completion of the opening/closing execution mode. At least one of the contents is different. The details will be described later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (symbols), and the final stop result becomes the addition correspondence result in the game times in which a predetermined jackpot result is obtained. In the gaming machine, in order to make the player think that it is in a variable display state in which the above-mentioned assignment corresponding result is likely to occur in the stage before the stop display is derived and displayed after the start of variable display of the pattern (pattern) on the symbol display device 41. Means the display state of. In addition, as for the assignment correspondence result, specifically, the combination of the symbols with the same numbers is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines.

Two types of expected display are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the result of the assignment response in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for some of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, thereby displaying the combination of the reach symbols, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol column is included. Further, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and by performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , A combination of reach patterns is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on almost the entire display screen G to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 since the variable display of the symbols is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, or in a part of the symbol columns. In a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen may be a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, or the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be a predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice display can occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time when the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result and the special outlier result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, it is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the normal disengagement result, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If executed.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not in the main controller 71 but in the sound emission controller 72. In this case, in the sound emission control device 72, a notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results or the special deviation results than in the game times corresponding to the normal deviation results, and the appearance rate. In order to satisfy at least one of the conditions that a low notice display is likely to occur, the lottery process for the notice display is executed. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for game use is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 92 determines the display duration time on the main display portion 43 and the symbol display duration time on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation display is started on the main display portion 43 and when the variation of the symbol is started by the symbol display device 41 when the variation pattern is determined.

<Various processes executed by main controller 71>
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed to advance the game in the MPU 92 in the main control unit 71 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the MPU 92 executes the main processing started when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing started by the input of the power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). A description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is activated by the MPU 92 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the state of each of the various prize detection sensors 96a to 96e is read, the state of each of the various prize detection sensors 96a to 96e is determined, and the process of storing the prize detection information is executed. Further, when the winning detection of the game ball is detected by the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e corresponding to the generation of the winning ball, a prize ball command for instructing the payout controller 78 to pay the winning ball is set. To do. For example, when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is detected, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls as a specific unit number is set. In a succeeding step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In a succeeding step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when they reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 94.

In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning in the through gate 35 is executed. In the through winning process, when the winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the number of stored accessory holdings stored in the electric power holding area 94c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). Under the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 94c. Further, the sound emission control device 72 is subjected to a process for turning on the second holding lamp section 46 corresponding to the number of stored accessory storages.

After that, in steps S105 to S108, a winning process for the operating port is executed. In the winning process for the working opening, first, in step S105, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. If no winning has occurred, the timer interrupt processing is ended.

If a winning has occurred, is it determined in step S106 that the starting reserved storage number NA stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 94a is less than the upper limit value (for example, "4"). Determine whether or not. When the number NA of starting pending storages is the upper limit value, this timer interrupt processing is ended as it is, and when the number NA of starting pending storages is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S107.

In step S107, 1 is added to the number NA of starting pending storages. In the following step S108, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored as holding information in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 94a. In this case, it is stored in the first holding area among the empty holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE, that is, the holding area corresponding to the current number of starting holding storages. Further, the voice light emission control device 72 is subjected to a process for turning on the first holding lamp unit 45 corresponding to the number of starting hold storages. After the processing of step S108 is executed, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 78. Further, when a command for production such as a command corresponding to the game turning effect or a command corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is set, it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72. Further, the output setting for the external terminal board 81 is performed according to the information set in the external output buffer 94d of the RAM 94. Such processing will be described in detail later.

In the subsequent step S202, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 94.

In a succeeding step S203, a game time control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In the game time control process, the winning/disapproval determination and the distribution determination are performed, and the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display device 41 is set and the display control of the main display unit 43 is performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later.

Then, in a step S204, a game state transition process is executed. Although the details will be described later, the game state shift processing shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like.

In a succeeding step S205, an electric power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric power accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release of whether or not the electric role object 34a is opened using the numerical information acquired from the electric role open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 94c of the RAM 94. In addition to performing the lottery, when the electric-role open state wins, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Further, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role open lottery.

Here, as described above, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the modes of support by the electric accessory 34a, and a transition to any one of the support modes is performed in the game state transition processing. Be seen. In this case, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94, and the low frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is not set.

In the electric power support process, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode is set in the RAM 94 to determine whether the high frequency support mode is set. In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state is set to be larger when the power combination open state is won than in the low frequency support mode. Set the opening time longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the electric state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, one open state ends and the next open state starts. It is set so that the closing time up to is shorter than one opening time.

By the way, when the open/close execution mode is entered, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94.

In a succeeding step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch period is provided on condition that the launch permission signal output from the power supply and launch control device 79 is input based on the launch operation performed on the launch handle 55. The solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 51 is excited once (for example, 0.6 sec). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In a succeeding step S207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the RAM 94. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 95 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 95 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 92, and is erased in the next main processing.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has ended, and thus it is determined in step S208 whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the last normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 207 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, and therefore, the processing at the time of power failure after step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, after that, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S212, and the access to the RAM 94 is prohibited in step S213, and then the power is completely cut off to perform the processing. Continue infinite loop until can no longer be executed.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game time control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. When in the open/close execution mode, this game is executed without executing any of the processing of step S302 and thereafter, that is, the game time start processing of steps S303 to S305 and the game time progression processing of steps S306 to S310. The turn control process ends. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game game is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has been paid to the operating ports 33, 34.

If it is not in the open/close execution mode, in step S302, it is determined whether or not the main display portion 43 is in a variable display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. If the main display portion 43 is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to the game number starting process of steps S303 to S305. In the process for starting game times, first in step S303, the number-of-holding storage area NA of the holding ball storage area 94a is referred to, and whether or not the number-of-holding-starting storage NA, which is the number of pieces of holding information held and stored, is "0" Determine whether. When the number NA of starting pending storages is "0", it means that the pending information is not stored in the pending ball storage area 94a. Therefore, this game time control processing is ended as it is. If the number NA of starting pending storages is not "0", a data setting process is executed in step S304.

In the data setting process, first, the number NA of starting reserved memories is subtracted. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 94a is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed.

This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first holding area RE1 and The data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area RE2→first holding area RE1, third holding area RE3→second holding area RE2, fourth holding area RE4→third holding area RE3.

In the data setting process, a process for causing the voice emission control device 72 to recognize that the holding information has been shifted and changing the display on the first holding lamp unit 45 in correspondence with the decrease in the number of holdings is executed. To do.

After the data setting process is executed, the variation start process is executed in step S305, and then the present game number control process is ended. Here, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S401, a win/fail judgment process is executed. In the win/loss determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, by referring to the high probability mode win/loss table among the tables stored in the win/loss table storage area 93a, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the win/fail judgment information, that is, It is determined whether or not the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability, and if it does not match the jackpot numerical information, it matches the numerical information for special deviation. Determine whether or not. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical value relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode among the tables stored in the win/loss table storage area 93a. It is determined whether or not the information matches the jackpot numerical value information for low probability, and if it does not match the jackpot numerical value information, it is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information for special deviation.

In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination process in step S401 is a jackpot winning result. If it is a jackpot winning result, a distribution determination process is executed in step S403.

In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 93b, it is specified which big hit result the numerical information related to the big hit type counter C2 thus grasped corresponds to. Specifically, low-probability jackpot result A, low-probability jackpot result B, low-probability jackpot result C, unspecified high-probability jackpot result A, implicit high-probability jackpot result B, explicit high-probability jackpot result A, explicit high-probability jackpot Which of the result B, the explicitly high-precision jackpot result C, and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to the jackpot result is specified.

In a succeeding step S404, a jackpot result stop result setting process is executed. Specifically, the information of the mode of the picture finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game time related to the start of fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 93, The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. In the jackpot result stop result table, the type of the pattern mode stopped and displayed on the main display portion 43 is set to be different for each kind of the jackpot result, and in step S404, the pattern is identified in step S403. The RAM 94 stores information on the pattern form according to the type of the jackpot result.

The information on the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the type counter C2. In this case, a pattern mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each game result, or a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each game result.

In a succeeding step S405, a process of setting a flag in the RAM 94 according to the kind of the jackpot result identified in step S403 is executed. Specifically, when it is specified that the low-probability jackpot result A is set, the low-probability A flag is set, and when it is specified that the low-probability jackpot result B is set, the low-probability B flag is set and low. When it is specified that it is the exact jackpot result C, the low-probability C flag is set, and when it is specified that it is the implicit high-precision jackpot result A, the implicit A flag is set, and the implicit high-probability jackpot is set. If it is specified that the result is B, the implicit B flag is set, if it is specified as the explicit high-precision jackpot result A, the explicit A flag is set, and it is the explicit high-precision jackpot result B. Is set, the explicit B flag is set, the explicit high-precision jackpot result C is set, the explicit C flag is set, and the most advantageous jackpot result is most advantageous. Set the flag. In the following description, it is determined whether or not various jackpot results are obtained by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the RAM 94 is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that it is not the jackpot winning result, it is determined in step S406 whether or not the result of the win/loss determination process in step S401 is a special outlier result. If it is the special deviation result, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S407, a stop result setting process for the special disengagement result is executed. Specifically, the information of the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game time related to the start of the fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the special disengagement result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result. In a succeeding step S408, a process of setting the special disengagement flag in the RAM 94 is executed.

If it is determined in step S406 that the result is not the special disconnection result, the stop result setting process for the normal disconnection result is executed in step S409. Specifically, the information of the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game time related to the start of the fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the special disengagement result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the special out-of-range result.

After executing any one of the processes of step S405, step S408, and step S409, a display continuation time (display continuation period) setting process is executed in step S410.

In this process, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 94 is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 in the current game time. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the variation this time are the most advantageous jackpot result or the low-probability jackpot result C, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Further, even when the result is neither the most advantageous jackpot result nor the low-probability jackpot result C, it is not any other jackpot result or special outlier result, and numerical information relating to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE. Is numerical value information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the reach generation display continuation time table stored in the ROM 93 is referred to, the display continuation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired, and the display thereof is displayed. The duration information is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 93 is referred to obtain the display duration information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time. Then, the display duration information is set in the display duration counter. By the way, the display duration that can be obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be obtained by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table.

The display continuation time information when the reach is not generated is set so that the display continuation time becomes shorter as the number of the start pending storage numbers NA increases. In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the support frequency is the low-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of holding information is the same, the reach non-reach An occurrence display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the display continuation time does not change according to the number NA of start pending storages and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when the reach occurs. In addition, a display continuation time table may be set individually for each of the various jackpot results, the special outlier result, the outlier reach time, and the normal outlier result without reach. In this case, the display continuation time is distributed according to each game result.

After the display continuation time setting process is executed in step S410, the variation command and the type command are set in step S411. The variation command includes information on the display duration time. Here, as described above, the display duration obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table. Even if the use command does not include the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the audio emission control device 72 which is the sub-side control device can specify the presence or absence of the reach occurrence from the information of the display continuation time. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variation command may include information that directly indicates whether or not the reach has occurred.

Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, in the type command, as the information of the game result, information of low-probability jackpot result A, information of low-probability jackpot result B, information of low-probability jackpot result C, information of implicit high precision jackpot result A, implicit high Probable jackpot result B information, Explicit high-probable jackpot result A information, Explicit high-probable jackpot result B information, Explicit high-probable jackpot result C information, Most advantageous jackpot result information, Special outlier result information, and normal deviation Contains the resulting information.

The variation command and the type command set in step S411 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The processing performed by the voice emission control device 72 upon receiving these commands will be described later.

After the process of step S411 is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started on the main display portion 43 in step S412. Then, in step S413, after performing the external output cancellation processing, the fluctuation start processing ends. The details of the external output cancellation processing will be described later in detail.

Returning to the explanation of the game time control process (FIG. 13 ), when the main display portion 43 is being variably displayed, the game time progression process of steps S306 to S310 is executed.

In the game time progression process, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the display duration time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the display continuation time information stored in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 94 has become “0”. The value of the display duration information is set in the display duration setting process (step S410) as described above. Further, the value of the set display duration information is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is activated.

If the display continuation time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 43 is changed. Then, this game time control processing is ended.

If the display continuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation ending process is executed in step S308. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 94 in one of the steps S404, S407 and S409 of the fluctuation starting process (FIG. 14) executed when starting the currently executed game time is specified. The display of the main display unit 43 is controlled so that the mode of the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 43.

Here, the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is different for each game result. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually confirm the game result of the game time by visually checking the main display portion 43 at the end of the game time, and the pachinko machine 10 behaves similarly to the jackpot result, for example. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the wrongdoing that the user is trying to perform is performed. On the other hand, the main display unit 43 has a narrower display range than the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is at least compared with various jackpot results and special outlier results. If this happens, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, the player is expected to confirm the game result of the game times from the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, not from the main display unit 43, and the attention to the display screen G is increased.

In a succeeding step S309, a fluctuation end command is set. The fluctuation end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 72 executes a process for ending the effect in the game time, based on the reception of the variation end command. It should be noted that the variation end command may not be transmitted, and the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111 may be configured to end the effect for game use independently.

After that, in step S310, after executing an external output setting process for the number of games, this game number control process is ended. The details of the external output setting process for the number of games will be described later in detail.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display of the pattern on the main display portion 43 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S503 whether or not the game result of the game time ended this time corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result this time is any of the jackpot results or the special outlier result. When it does not correspond to the shift to the open/close execution mode, the main game state shift processing is ended as it is.

If it corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode, in a step S504, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is a special miss result. In the case of the special disengagement result, in step S505, the prize-winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 ends the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special disengagement result. "2" is set as the upper limit number which is a sufficient condition. In step S506, the open/close counter SOC provided in each counter area 94b of the RAM 94 is set to "15". The open/close counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the number of times that the special winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened/closed.

On the other hand, if the result is not the special outlier, that is, if it is one of the big hit results, "15" is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S507. The round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open/close execution mode.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, as the opening/closing execution mode, a round number defining mode in which a predetermined number of round games are executed as an upper limit and a round game is not set and the number of times of opening/closing the variable winning device 32 is the upper limit. An open/closed number regulation mode that is ended when either one of the conditions that the number of times is reached and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are won in the special winning opening 32a is satisfied is set.

It shifts to the round number regulation mode based on either jackpot result. Here, the round game, either one of the conditions that a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special winning opening 32a. It is a game that continues until is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the round game, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed is the upper limit number, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are won in the special winning opening 32a. The game may be continued until one of the conditions is satisfied.

The number of round games executed in the round number defining mode is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

On the other hand, the opening/closing number regulation mode is shifted based on the special disengagement result. As described above, the number-of-opens-and-closes mode is that one of the conditions that the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed is the upper limit number and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls is won in the special winning opening 32a. It ends when it is satisfied. In this case, the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number. Further, after the upper limit number is set when the opening/closing number defining mode is started, the upper limit number is not newly set in the opening/closing number defining mode. Therefore, for example, when a winning of one game ball to the special winning opening 32a occurs each time the big winning opening 32a is opened, the end condition related to the upper limit number is more than the end condition related to the upper limit number of times. Even if it is established first and the opening/closing of the maximum winning opening 32a has not been completed, the opening/closing number defining mode ends.

It is to be noted that the opening/closing number defining mode is based on that either one of the condition that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses and that the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the special winning opening 32a are satisfied. The mode may be terminated. However, even in such a mode, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 substantially has the upper limit number in relation to the upper limit continuation time.

After executing the process of step S507, a round setting process is executed in step S508. The setting process for the round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, "9" is set in the winning counter PC of the RAM 94 as the upper limit number which is one sufficient condition for ending the round game. This number is larger than the upper limit number of the opening/closing number defining mode that is shifted when the special disengagement result occurs. In other words, the upper limit number, which is one sufficient condition for ending the opening/closing number regulation mode, is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number, which is one sufficient condition for ending the round game.

Further, the setting process for the round is a process that is activated at a timing earlier than that when a new round game is started in the round number defining mode, and if the activation is performed, step S601 is executed. The process is executed. Therefore, in a configuration in which a plurality of round games are executed within the range of one round number defining mode, the upper limit number is set individually for each round game. Then, in the round number defining mode, in a situation where the round game is not executed for the upper limit number of times, when the round game is finished, the next round game is newly started. In other words, in the round number defining mode, even if the upper limit number of game balls is won to the special winning opening 32a during one round game or during one opening, the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit number. If not, the open/close execution mode is continued.

On the other hand, in the case of the opening/closing number regulation mode, as described above, after the upper limit number is set when the opening/closing number regulation mode is started, the upper limit number is newly set in the opening/closing number regulation mode. Absent. Therefore, when the upper limit number of game balls is won to the large winning opening 32a during one opening, or the total number of game ball winnings that occur until the opening of a plurality of times is completed is the upper limit. When the number has been reached, the opening/closing number regulation mode ends even if the opening/closing of the special winning opening 32a having the upper limit number of times has not been completed.

After executing the process of step S601, it is determined in step S602 whether or not this time is a process for specifying the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in the first round of the round number defining mode. Since this time is the setting process for the round started at the start of the round number defining mode, an affirmative judgment is made in step S602, and the flow proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the shift to the round number defining mode this time is the explicit high certainty jackpot result C. In the case of the explicit high certainty jackpot result C, the opening/closing counter SOC is set to "19" in step S604, and then the present setting process is ended. If it is not the explicit high certainty jackpot result C, it is determined in step S605 whether or not the game result that triggered the above shift is the explicit high certainty jackpot result B. If the result is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, the open/close counter SOC is set to "15" in step S606, and then the present setting process is ended. If it is not the explicit high-probability jackpot result B, it is determined in step S607 whether the game result that triggered the transition is the low-probability jackpot result B or the implicit high-probability jackpot result B. If the result is one of the jackpots, the open/close counter SOC is set to "8" in step S608, and then the setting process ends. If the result is not one of the jackpots, the open/close counter SOC is set to "1" in step S609, and then the setting process ends.

In other words, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 set in the 1st R is different depending on the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition, although it is not 1:1. Note that the processing after step S610 will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing (FIG. 15), after executing the processing of step S506 or step S508, in step S509, the waiting time for opening the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. "2000" is set as the (waiting period). The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 4 seconds. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

Further, in the case of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whichever kind of game result triggered that, the waiting time for opening is set in step S509. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening/closing execution mode is the same regardless of the type of the game result that triggered it. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for the opening is slightly different, the player may recognize it as the same, for example, as the most advantageous jackpot result. When a part of the game result is a trigger, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where another game result is a trigger.

After executing the process of step S509, an opening command is set in step S510. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time. Further, the opening command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The processing performed by the voice emission control device 72 upon receiving the opening command will be described later.

After that, in step S511, after executing the external output setting process at the time of mode transition, this game state transition process is ended. The contents of the external output setting process at the time of mode transition will be described later in detail.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S512. In step S512, a delay external output setting process is executed. The details of the delay external output setting process will be described later. In a succeeding step S513, a special winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The special winning opening opening/closing processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is open. If the special winning opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S702 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0", and in step S703 whether the value of the timer counter T is "0". Determine whether or not.

By the way, in the opening/closing execution mode (step S501: YES), the special winning opening 32a is closed (step S701: NO), and the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is “0” (step S702: YES). ) Means that it is in the waiting time for the ending. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode (step S501: YES), the special winning opening 32a is closed (step S701: NO), and the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not "0" (step S702: NO). Further, when the value of the timer counter T is not "0" (step S703: NO), it is during the waiting time for opening or during the waiting time from when the special winning opening 32a is closed to when it is opened again. Means that.

When the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is “0” or the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. If the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter T is "0", the special winning opening opening process is executed after the special winning opening opening process is executed in step S704. finish.

The special winning opening opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, the game result that triggered the switching of the opening/closing execution mode being executed this time is one of the low-probability jackpot result A, the implicit high-probability jackpot result A, the explicit high-probability jackpot result A, and the special outlier result. Is determined. When a positive determination is made in step S801, the timer counter T is set to "30" in step S802. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is activated as described above, the release time set in step S802 is It is 60 msec.

When a negative determination is made in step S801, in step S803, the game result triggered by the fact that the special winning opening opening process of this time is activated is the low-probability jackpot result B and the first R- Whether it corresponds to the 2R, the game result that triggered the above is the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B, and the game result that triggered the above is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result. Whether it is B and corresponds to 1R to 2R, or whether the game result triggered by the above is the explicit high-precision jackpot result C and 1R and not the final opening/closing timing. , Is determined.

When a positive determination is made in step S803, the timer counter T is set to "30" in step S802. If a negative decision is made in step S803, the operation proceeds to step S804. In step S804, the situation in which the special winning opening opening process of this time is activated corresponds to the situation in which the game result triggered by the above is the explicit high certainty jackpot result C and the first opening and closing timing. It is determined.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S804, then "10000" is set in the timer counter T in step S805. When a negative determination is made in step S804, "14500" is set in the timer counter T in step S806. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated, as described above. Therefore, the release time set in step S805 is 20 sec. In addition, the opening time set in step S806 is 29 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S802, step S805, or step S806, the release execution processing is executed in step S807. In the opening execution process, the variable winning drive unit 32c is drive-controlled so that the special winning opening 32a is opened.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, one opening mode of the variable winning a prize device 32 is set to a plurality of types by changing the opening continuation time (opening continuation period) from the opening of the special winning opening 32a to the closing thereof. Has been done. Specifically, a long time mode (long mode) in which the open duration is set to 29 sec which is the longest time, and a medium time mode in which the open duration is set to 20 sec which is an intermediate time shorter than the longest time ( A medium period mode) and a short period mode (short period mode) in which the open duration time is set to 0.06 sec which is the shortest time shorter than the intermediate time period are set.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Controlled. In addition, the upper limit number of the ending condition is set to 9 in the round game, and the upper limit number of the ending condition is also set to 2 in the opening/closing number regulation mode. Then, in the long-time mode and the medium-time mode among the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening continuation time of a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or opening/closing number regulation mode is set. Will be there. On the other hand, in the short time mode, a time shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or the opening/closing number regulation mode, more specifically, opening of a time shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball Duration is set. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode or a medium time mode, the maximum winning number 32a is equal to the upper limit number in one round game or opening/closing number defining mode. If a prize is expected to be generated and the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a short time, no prize will be paid to the special winning opening 32a, or one prize will be paid Expected to be around.

Also, depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition and the progress of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening mode set for one opening of the variable winning a prize device 32 is different. ing.

After the process of step S807 is executed, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the opening of the special winning opening 32a this time is related to a new start of the round game in the round number defining mode. If the affirmative judgment is made in step S808, the round start command is set in step S809, then the main winning opening opening process is ended, and if the negative judgment is made in step S808, the main winning is held as it is. The mouth opening process is ended. The round start command set in step S809 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice emission control device 72 recognizes that the round game is newly started. It

Returning to the explanation of the special winning opening/closing processing (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S701 that the special winning opening 32a is open, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, whether or not the timer counter T is "0" is determined to determine whether or not the opening duration time has elapsed for the current opening of the special winning opening 32a. When the timer counter T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S706.

In step S706, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the special winning opening 32a. If no winning has occurred, the main winning opening opening/closing processing is ended as it is. If a winning has occurred, in step S707, the numerical information of the winning counter PC is updated so that 1 is subtracted. In a succeeding step S708, it is determined whether or not this time is the first round of the round number defining mode and the opening mode of the variable winning device 32 is a short time mode. If the situation is such, a premium command is set in step S709. Here, the set premium command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The processing in the voice emission control device 72 upon receiving the premium command will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S708 or after the processing of step S709 is executed, it is determined in step S710 whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". When the winning counter PC is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. If the winning counter PC is "0", a closing execution process is executed in step S711. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is ended so that the currently-opened special winning opening 32a is closed.

In a succeeding step S712, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the shift of the opening/closing execution mode being executed this time is a special out-of-match result. If it is not the special deviation result, a round end command is set in step S713. The round end command set here is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice emission control device 72 recognizes that the round game has ended.

In the following step S714, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted, and then in step S715, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "0". If the round counter RC is not "0", the round setting process is executed in step S716. The setting process for the round will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the round setting process, as described above, first, the winning counter PC is set to "9" in step S601, and in the subsequent step S602, the variable winning device 32 in the first round of the round number defining mode is this time. It is determined whether or not the process is for specifying the number of times of opening and closing. This time, since it is the setting process for the round started in the middle of the round number defining mode, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the process proceeds to step S610.

In step S610, it is determined whether or not this time is a process for specifying the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in the second round of the round number defining mode. If it corresponds to the second round, in step S611, whether the game result that triggered the shift to the round number regulation mode this time is the low-probability jackpot result B or the implicit high-probability jackpot result B. Determine whether. If the result is one of these jackpots, the open/close counter SOC is set to "8" in step S612, and then the setting process ends. If none of the above jackpot results, the open/close counter SOC is set to "1" in step S613, and then this setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S610 that this time does not correspond to the 2R, the open/close counter SOC is set to "1" in step S614, and then the present setting process ends.

In other words, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 set in the 2R is different depending on the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition, although the number is not 1:1. On the other hand, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning a prize device 32 set after the 3rd round is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition.

Returning to the description of the special winning opening/closing processing (FIG. 17), after executing the round setting processing in step S716, after setting "750" to the timer counter T in step S717, opening/closing of the main winning opening The process ends. The numerical information set in this case is numerical information for the round start waiting time between consecutive round games, and in the pachinko machine 10, 1.5 sec is set. In this case, the numerical information for the round start waiting time is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the round number defining mode and regardless of the progress of the round number defining mode.

When it is determined in step S715 that the round counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S718. In step S718, an ending command is set. The ending command set here is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice light emission control device 72 recognizes that the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In a succeeding step S719, "3000" is set in the timer counter T as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. After that, the main prize opening/closing processing is ended. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the waiting time for ending is 6 seconds, which is longer than the waiting time for opening. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated, the waiting time for ending is set in step S719 regardless of the type of game result that triggered it. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is the same in any of the open/close execution modes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for ending is slightly different, it may be configured so that it is recognized by the player as the same, for example, as the most advantageous jackpot result. When a part of the game result is a trigger, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where another game result is a trigger.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S712, that is, if the game result that triggered the switching of the opening/closing execution mode being executed this time is the special out-of-game result, the process proceeds to step S720. In step S720, it is determined whether the open/close counter SOC is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the winning number of game balls reaches the upper limit number in the last opening of the special winning opening 32a in the opening/closing number defining mode. If an affirmative decision is made in step S720, the operation proceeds to step S718. The processing after step S718 is as already described.

If a negative determination is made in step S720, that is, if the current opening number is not the last opening number in the opening/closing number defining mode, the process proceeds to step S721 to set a teaching command. In the opening/closing number regulation mode triggered by the special disengagement result, the teaching command is that the winning number of game balls to the special winning port 32a reaches the upper limit number before the maximum winning number 32a is opened. It is a command transmitted in order to cause the voice emission control device 72 to recognize that it has reached. The teaching command set here is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice emission control device 72 recognizes that the above condition is satisfied. The specific processing contents in the sound emission control device 72 when receiving such a command will be described later.

After executing the processing of step S721, the process proceeds to step S719. The processing after step S719 is as already described.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S705 that the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S722. In step S722, a closing execution process is executed. The content of the closing execution process is the same as in step S711.

In the following step S723, the numerical information of the opening/closing counter SOC is updated so that 1 is subtracted, and in step S724, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing counter SOC is "0". If the opening/closing counter SOC is not "0", the timer counter T is set to "750" in step S717, and then the main winning opening/closing processing is ended.

The numerical information set in step S717 in the flow of the above processing is numerical information for the opening waiting time until the variable winning a prize device 32 is changed from the opened state to the closed state, and then to the opened state again. In machine 10, 1.5 sec is set. In this case, the numerical information for the open waiting time is the same regardless of the type of game result that triggered the shift to the open/close execution mode, and regardless of the progress status of the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, the numerical information for the open waiting time is the same as the numerical information for the round start waiting time between consecutive round games. As a result, the opening waiting time when the variable winning device 32 is continuously opened and closed can be made constant.

When it is determined in step S724 that the open/close counter SOC is "0", the process proceeds to step S725. In step S725, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode being executed this time is a special disengagement result.

If the game result triggered above is not a special miss result, that is, if the game result triggered above is any jackpot result, a round end command is set in step S726. The process when the round end command is set is the same as in step S713.

Then, in step S727, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted. In a succeeding step S728, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "0". If the round counter RC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S716. The processing after step S716 is as already described.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S725 or if an affirmative decision is made in step S728, the operation proceeds to step S718. The processing after step S718 is as already described.

The game state transition process including the special winning opening/closing process proceeds as in step S501 to step S513, whereby the open/close execution mode according to the game result that triggered the transition is executed. In this case, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by any of the low-probability jackpot result A, the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result A, the explicit high-probability jackpot result A, and the special deviation result, the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is almost the same. (Hereinafter, also referred to as a pattern A opening/closing execution mode).

Further, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by any one of the low-probability jackpot result B, the imprecise high-probability jackpot result B, and the explicit high-probability jackpot result B, the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is substantially the same (hereinafter, the pattern. (Also referred to as B open/close execution mode). In this case, as compared with the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, the time for which the opening/closing execution mode continues continues longer, and the number of times of opening/closing of the variable winning device 32 increases.

In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-precision jackpot result C, the variable winning device 32 is controlled by an opening/closing pattern different from both the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A and the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B (hereinafter, Also referred to as the opening/closing execution mode of pattern C). Further, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by either the low-probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is substantially the same (hereinafter, also referred to as the opening/closing execution mode of pattern D). In this case, the open/close execution mode of the pattern D is controlled by the open/close pattern different from any of the open/close execution modes of the patterns A to C.

Here, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, and the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, there is a section in which the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is common from the start timing to the timing in the middle. Then, the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A is ended as the common section is exhausted. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B and the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, it continues even after the common section is exhausted. In this case, the continuation mode is different between the pattern B open/close execution mode and the pattern C open/close execution mode. This allows the player to predict which opening/closing execution mode the opening/closing execution mode is at the start of the opening/closing execution mode while diversifying the opening/closing execution mode. Details of such action and effect will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing (FIG. 15), after executing the special winning opening opening/closing processing in step S513, the processing proceeds to step S514. In step S514, it is determined whether both the round counter RC and the open/close counter SOC are "0". If either one is not "0", the main game state transition processing is ended as it is. If both are "0", it is determined in step S515 whether the timer counter T is "0". When the timer counter T is not "0", the game state transition processing is ended as it is. If the timer counter T is "0", the external output canceling process in the support mode is executed in step S516. The contents of the external output cancellation processing will be described later. After that, in step S517, after executing the transition process at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode, this game state transition process is terminated.

The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the switching of the opening/closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous jackpot result or any explicit high-accuracy jackpot result. If an affirmative decision is made in step S901, in step S902, if the high-frequency support flag has not been set in the RAM 94, that flag is set, and if it has already been set, that state is maintained. .. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

In a succeeding step S903, when the number-of-times limitation flag is set in the RAM 94, the number-of-times limitation flag is cleared. When the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94 and the number-of-times limitation flag is not set, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes one of the jackpot results. It

In a succeeding step S904, if the high-probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the winning/winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Further, this high-probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes one of the jackpot results. After that, in step S905, after executing the external output setting process in the support mode, this transition process is ended. The external output setting process in this support mode will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the game result that triggered the shift of the opening/closing execution mode executed this time is any implicit high-precision jackpot result. To do. When an affirmative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94.

When the high-frequency support flag is set, the process of steps S903 to S905 already described is executed, and then the present migration process ends. If the high-frequency support flag is not set, in step S908, if the high-probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, that state is maintained. To do. As a result, the winning/winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Further, this high-probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes one of the jackpot results. Then, this migration process is completed.

When a negative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S909 whether or not the game result that triggered the switching of the opening/closing execution mode executed this time is any low-probability jackpot result. .. When a negative determination is made in step S909, this transition processing is ended as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, the high-probability mode flag is cleared in step S910 if the high-probability mode flag is set in the RAM 94. Thereby, the winning/winning lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. Further, this low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the most advantageous result or one of the highly accurate results.

In a succeeding step S911, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the switching of the opening/closing execution mode executed this time is the low-probability jackpot result C. If it is the low-probability jackpot result C, in step S912, if the high-frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, that state is maintained. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

Then, in step S913, "100" is set to the game number counter provided in each counter area 94b of the RAM 94. In a succeeding step S914, if the number-of-times limitation flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the high-frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times, which is the end reference number, and when 100 game times are exhausted, both the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared. And shift to the low frequency support mode. By the way, although the detailed description is omitted, the process is executed in the electric power combination support process of step S205 in the normal process (FIG. 12). After that, after executing the support mode external output setting process in step S915, the present transition process is ended. The external output setting process in the support mode will be described later.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S911, that is, when the low-probability jackpot result A or the low-probability jackpot result B is determined, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. To do. When a negative determination is made in step S916, the main transition process is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S916, the main transition process is ended after executing the processes of steps S913 to S915. At the end of the shift process, the flag corresponding to the game result information set in the RAM 94 is cleared.

As described above, when the game result of the game time is the most advantageous jackpot result or any of the explicit high-precision jackpot results, the opening/closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number defining mode), the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next big hit result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening/closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

In addition, when the game result of the game times is any of the implicit high-precision jackpot results, if the state at the time of the game times is the high-frequency support mode, the open/close execution mode (that is, , Round number regulation mode), the game state shifts to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes a big hit result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening/closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

On the other hand, when the state at the time the game is played is the low frequency support mode, after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode), the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are the games. Transition to the state. These high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are continued at least until the next game result of the game times is the big hit result. By the way, in this case, after the opening/closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating the high probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

In addition, when the game result of the game time is the low-probability jackpot result C, it is low after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode) is ended regardless of the state at the time when the game time is performed. It shifts to the game state which is the probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low-probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times is the next jackpot result, and the high-frequency support mode is 100 game times without the game result of the game times being the jackpot result. In case of low frequency support mode. By the way, after the opening/closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating the low probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

Further, when the game result of the game times is the low-probability jackpot result A or the low-probability jackpot result B, if the state at the time of the game tour is the high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution mode After the end of the (ie, round number defining mode), the game state is switched to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low-probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times is the next big hit result, and the high frequency support mode is 100 times of the game times are exhausted without the game result of the game times being the big hit result. In case of low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the state at the time the game is played is the low frequency support mode, after the end of the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode), the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are the games. Transition to the state. These low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are continued until at least the game result of the game times becomes the next big hit result.

By the way, in the case of the low-probability jackpot result A or the low-probability jackpot result B, after the opening/closing execution mode, the image clearly indicating the low probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In addition, the game state that is not the open/close execution mode but is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode corresponds to the normal game state.

In addition, when the game result of the game times includes any of the deviation results including the special deviation result, the shift of the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

<Regarding effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 72>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 102 in the sound emission control device 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect determination process is activated by the MPU 102 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the mode lottery conditions are met.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of effect modes are set so that the effect contents selected in the effect for game play are different. Specifically, a low-expectation production mode, a medium-expectation production mode, a high-expectation production mode, and a highly-determined production mode are set. The low-expectation production mode, the medium-expectation production mode, and the high-expectation production mode may be selected regardless of whether the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode. Mode. However, when the selection rates are different from each other and the low-probability mode is set, the selection rates are set to be low-expectation production mode>medium-expectation production mode>high-expectation production mode. In addition, in the case of the high probability mode, the selection rate is set such that the low expectation effect mode <medium expectation effect mode <high expectation effect mode. Further, the high-probability-determined effect mode is not selected in the low-probability mode, and is selected in the high-probability mode.

In each effect mode, the types of symbols that are variably displayed on each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the game-use effect are the same, but the background image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 and the expected effect are displayed. It is set so that the type of character displayed on the display screen G at the time of execution and the content of the effect selected in the super-reach display with high expectation for the jackpot result among the reach displays are different. Further, since the speaker unit 59 outputs the sound effect corresponding to the content of the display effect on the display screen G, it can be said that the output mode of the sound is different between the effect modes. However, the mode of the difference between the effect modes is not limited to the above, and at least one of the background image, the type of the character, the content of the effect selected, and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 59 is used. It may be different, and the other effect contents may be different.

In addition, the mode lottery condition will be satisfied when the production mode transition occurrence lottery is won in a situation in which a production mode other than the highly accurate confirmed production mode is set. In the transition occurrence lottery, a loop counter that is periodically updated in the RAM 104 is used, and the transition occurrence win is achieved when the counter value acquired at the timing of step S1002 corresponds to the transition occurrence win.

When it is determined in step S1002 that the mode lottery condition is satisfied, the effect mode lottery process is executed in step S1003. In the effect mode lottery process, a loop counter that is regularly updated in the RAM 104 is used, and the numerical information of the loop counter corresponds to the numerical range corresponding to the low expectation effect mode and the intermediate expectation effect mode. An effect lottery table assigned to any of the numerical range and the numerical range corresponding to the high-expecting production mode is used. In this case, the production lottery table is set corresponding to each of the case where the win/win lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the case where the win/win lottery mode is the high-probability mode. The selection rates of the medium-expectation production mode and the high-expectation production mode are set to have the above relationship. However, each effect lottery table does not include a high-accuracy finalization effect mode, and the high-accuracy finalization effect mode is excluded from the lottery target of the effect mode lottery process.

Although not described in detail with reference to the drawings, the main control device 71 transmits to the sound emission control device 72 as a command information indicating which mode is the win/loss lottery mode. It is possible to grasp the current win/fail lottery mode.

In step S1003, the effect lottery table corresponding to the current win/win lottery mode is read from the ROM 103, the numerical information for lottery is read from the loop counter of the RAM 104, and both are collated. Then, in step S1004, the effect mode corresponding to the matching result in step S1003 is set as the effect mode of the transfer destination. It should be noted that the RAM 104 is provided with an effect mode counter having a counter value corresponding to each effect mode on a one-to-one basis, and the MPU 102 sets the effect mode by updating the counter value of the effect mode counter. At the same time, the current effect mode is grasped from the counter value of the effect mode counter.

When a negative determination is made in step S1002 or after the execution of step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, based on the content of the type command received in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game time started this time is the most advantageous jackpot result or the low-probability jackpot result C.

When it is the most advantageous big hit result or the low-probability big hit result C, in step S1006, a symbol determination process corresponding to the kind of the big hit result is executed. In the symbol determination process, in the case of the most advantageous jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of odd symbols is established on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. To do. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the case of the low-probability jackpot result C, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of the even symbols is established on the one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the present stop result. In this case, the types of even symbols and the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

When it is determined in step S1005 that neither the most advantageous jackpot result nor the low-probability jackpot result C is obtained, the game result of the game time started this time is most advantageous based on the content of the type command in step S1007. It is judged whether it is a big hit result other than the big hit result and the low probability big hit result C or a special outlier result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, a common symbol determination process is executed in step S1008. In the symbol determination processing, a combination of predetermined common symbols on one effective line L1 to L5 (specifically, while preventing the same symbol combination from being established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (specifically, Determines the information corresponding to the stop result that "3.4.1") holds as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the common combination of symbols is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like, but may be predetermined as a specific effective line.

When a negative determination is made in step S1007, a symbol removal process for normal deviation is executed in step S1009. In the symbol determination process, based on the content of the variation command, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to the occurrence of the out-reach display, and if it is a game time related to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, one effective The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established on the lines L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of out-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the stop result in which the common symbol combination is not stopped and displayed is determined.

In addition, in the case of a game time related to the occurrence of the out-reach display, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the outreach symbols is not stopped and displayed is determined as the information of the current stop result.

In addition, in the symbol determination process for the normal disengagement, the stop result in which the combination of the common symbols is stopped and displayed may be selected.

After executing any one of steps S1006, S1008, and S1009, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, a process for determining the effect pattern of this game time is executed. In the process, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 103, the effect duration (effect duration) corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is selected, and Select the content. In this case, the production table is provided corresponding to each production mode, and in step S1010, the production table corresponding to the current production mode is referenced to select the production continuation time, and the production is performed. Select the contents of. In addition, a lottery on whether or not to display a notice is also performed. In the MPU 102, according to the effect pattern determined in step S1007, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 in the current game time is performed, and the output control of the speaker unit 59 is performed.

In subsequent step S1011, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1006, step S1008 or step S1009 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1010 are transmitted to display control device 111. The processing contents of the display control device 111 upon receiving these commands will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S1001 or after the processing of step S1011 is executed, it is determined in step S1012 whether or not an opening command is received. If the opening command is received, the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S1013.

The effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1101, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is a low-probability jackpot result A, an implicit high-probability jackpot result A, and a special miss result. It is determined which of the two. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1101, the operation proceeds to step S1102.

In step S1102, effect mode lottery processing is executed. The content of the effect mode lottery process is the same as that in step S1003. However, the selection of the low probability mode or the high probability mode as the effect lottery table is performed according to the win/loss lot mode after the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, when the information included in the opening command is the low-probability jackpot result A, the effect lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and when the information is the implicit high-probability jackpot result A, Select the production lottery table for the high probability mode. In the case of a special miss result, if the current win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, select the effect lottery table for the low probability mode, and if the current win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability mode. Select the production lottery table for.

After executing the process of step S1102, in step S1103, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of step S1102 is set as the effect mode of the transfer destination. In a succeeding step S1104, the effect A1 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 in the present opening/closing execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in accordance with the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A1.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode that is executed by any of the low-probability jackpot result A, the imprecise high-probability jackpot result A, and the special deviation result is the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A as already described, and its start The opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the end to the end is almost the same. The effect A1 is set in correspondence with the duration of the opening/closing execution mode when proceeding in the opening/closing pattern. It should be noted that the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A1 may be subdivided so that the mode of the light emission control and the mode of the audio output control correspond to the lottery result in step S1102.

In a succeeding step S1105, a production A1 system command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A1 system command includes information indicating that the display effect corresponding to the effect A1 should be performed, and information corresponding to the lottery result in step S1102. The processing contents of the display control device 111 upon receiving the command will be described later. After executing the process of step S1105, the effect determination process for the main opening/closing execution mode is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S1101, in step S1106, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is the low-probability jackpot result B. , The unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B or the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is determined. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1106, the operation proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, effect mode lottery processing is executed. The content of the effect mode lottery process is the same as that in step S1003. However, the selection of the low probability mode or the high probability mode as the effect lottery table is performed according to the win/loss lot mode after the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, when the information included in the opening command is the low-probability jackpot result B, the performance lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and the implicit high-precision jackpot result B or the explicit high-probability jackpot result is selected. In the case of B, the effect lottery table for the high probability mode is selected.

After executing the process of step S1107, in step S1108, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of step S1107 is set as the effect mode of the transfer destination. In a succeeding step S1109, the effect A2 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current opening/closing execution mode according to the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A2.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode executed with any of the low-probability jackpot result B, the implicit high-probability jackpot result B, and the explicit high-probability jackpot result B is the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B as already described. The opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end is almost common. The effect A2 is set in correspondence with the duration of the opening/closing execution mode when proceeding in the opening/closing pattern. The effect pattern corresponding to the effect A2 may be subdivided so that the mode of the light emission control and the mode of the audio output control correspond to the lottery result in step S1107.

In a succeeding step S1110, the effect A2 system command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A2 system command includes information indicating that the display effect corresponding to the effect A2 should be performed, and information corresponding to the lottery result in step S1107. The processing contents of the display control device 111 upon receiving the command will be described later.

In a succeeding step S1111, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is the explicit high certainty jackpot result B. If it is not the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, the effect determination process for the main opening/closing execution mode is ended as it is, and if it is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, the effect mode correction process is executed in step S1112. After that, the effect determination process for the main opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the effect mode correction process, the effect mode setting is modified from the effect mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process in step S1107 to the highly-determined effect mode. As a result, when the game-use effect is started after the opening/closing execution mode has ended, the game-use effect is not the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result in step S1107, but a highly-determined effect mode. Is done in. That is, when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is obtained, the effect in the opening/closing execution mode is the low-accuracy jackpot result B in which the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is common and the non-explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B. The same effect A2 is selected, but after the opening/closing execution mode, unlike the case of the low-probability big hit result B and the case of the implicit high-precision big hit result B, the high-accuracy confirmation effect is performed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1106, in step S1113, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is the explicit high-precision jackpot result. It is determined whether it is A. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1113, the operation proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1114, effect mode setting processing is executed. In the setting process of the effect mode, the highly accurate confirmation effect mode is set as the effect mode of the transition destination. In a succeeding step S1115, the effect A3 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 in the present opening/closing execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in accordance with the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A3.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode executed with the explicit high certainty jackpot result A as a trigger is the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A as already described, and the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end is low. It is common to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by any one of the certainty jackpot result A, the imprecise high certainty jackpot result A, and the special deviation result. The effect A3 is set in correspondence with the duration of the opening/closing execution mode when proceeding in the opening/closing pattern, but the content of the effect is different from the effect A1.

In a succeeding step S1116, the effect A3 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A3 command includes information indicating that the display effect corresponding to the effect A3 should be performed. Since the destination of the effect mode when the effect A3 is selected is fixed to the highly-determined effect mode as described above, the effect A3 command is dedicated information for individually specifying the effect mode. Is not included. After executing the processing of step S1116, the effect determination processing for the main opening/closing execution mode is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S1113, in step S1117, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is the explicit high-precision jackpot result. Determine if it is C. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1117, the operation proceeds to step S1118.

In step S1118, effect mode setting processing is executed. In the setting process of the effect mode, the highly accurate confirmation effect mode is set as the effect mode of the transition destination. In a succeeding step S1119, the effect A4 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp section 58 in the current opening/closing execution mode and the output control of the speaker section 59 in accordance with the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A4. Here, the opening/closing execution mode executed with the explicit high certainty jackpot result C as a trigger is the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C as described above. The effect A3 is set in correspondence with the duration of the opening/closing execution mode when proceeding in the opening/closing pattern.

In a succeeding step S1120, the effect A4 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A4 command includes information indicating that the display effect corresponding to the effect A4 should be performed. After executing the process of step S1120, the effect determination process for the main opening/closing execution mode is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1117, it means that the game result that triggered the transmission of the opening command is either the low-probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, so the flow proceeds to step S1121. ..

In step S1121, effect mode setting processing is executed. In the setting process of the effect mode, when the game result that is the trigger is the low-probability jackpot result C, the low-expectation effect mode is set as the destination effect mode, and the game result that is the trigger is When the result is the most advantageous jackpot, the high-accuracy fixed effect mode is set as the effect mode of the transition destination. In a succeeding step S1122, the effect B table is read. In this case, in the MPU 102, according to the effect pattern corresponding to the effect B, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 in the current open/close execution mode is performed, and the output control of the speaker unit 59 is performed. Here, the opening/closing execution mode that is executed by using either the low certainty jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result is the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern D as already described. The effect B is set in correspondence with the duration of the opening/closing execution mode when proceeding in the opening/closing pattern.

In a succeeding step S1123, the effect B command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect B command includes information indicating that the display effect corresponding to effect B should be performed. After executing the processing of step S1123, the effect determination processing for the main opening/closing execution mode is ended.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process (FIG. 20), if a negative determination is made in step S1012 or after the process of step S1013 is executed, it is determined in step S1014 whether a premium command is received. As described above, the premium command is transmitted in the first round of the round number defining mode, and when the winning mode of the special winning opening 32a occurs in a situation in which the opening mode of the variable winning device 32 is the short mode. ..

If a premium command has been received, in step S1015 a premium effect determination process is executed. In the MPU 102, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 are performed so that the premium effect is performed as a corresponding effect in the middle of the current round number defining mode.

In a succeeding step S1016, a premium effect command is transmitted to the display control device 111. The MPU 113 of the display control device 111 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the premium effect is performed in the middle of the current round number defining mode. For example, an image such as a special character that does not appear in the normal production for the opening/closing execution mode is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a video for premium.

When a negative determination is made in step S1014 or after the processing of step S1016 is executed, it is determined in step S1017 whether or not a teaching command is received. As described above, the teaching command is, in the opening/closing number defining mode triggered by the special disengagement result, before the upper limit number of the special winning opening 32a is opened, the game ball of the special winning opening 32a is opened. Sent when the number of winning prizes reaches the upper limit.

If the teaching command is received, the teaching effect determination process is executed in step S1018. In the MPU 102, during the current opening/closing number defining mode, the effect table to be referred to is changed so that the content of the effect to be executed is switched from the effect A1 to the effect for teaching. As a result, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 so as to correspond to the teaching effect.

Further, when the opening/closing number regulation mode is ended on the basis that the number of winning game balls for the special winning opening 32a has reached the upper limit, regardless of whether the number of times of opening the special winning opening 32a has reached the upper limit. After that, after the waiting time for ending has elapsed, the opening/closing number defining mode is ended. In response to this, the effect duration of the teaching effect corresponds to the waiting time for ending, more specifically, the waiting time for ending is the same.

In a succeeding step S1019, a teaching effect command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In the MPU 113 of the display control device 111, in the middle of the opening/closing number regulation mode of this time, the effect table to be referenced is changed so that the content of the display effect to be executed is switched from the effect A1 to the teaching effect, Display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the teaching effect is performed. For example, an image such as a character or a character indicating that the opening/closing execution mode this time is triggered by the special disconnection result is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a moving image for teaching.

When a negative determination is made in step S1017 or after the processing of step S1019 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1020. In other processing, for example, processing for advancing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed based on the reception of the round start command, the round end command, and the ending command. However, the processing for advancing the effect based on the reception of the round start command and the round end command is not executed in the round game in which the special winning opening 32a is opened/closed in the short time mode, and the big winning in the long time mode is performed. It is executed in a round game in which the mouth 32a is opened and closed. After that, the main effect determination process ends.

Note that, when the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 receives a command related to a new setting of the effect table in a situation where the effect execution control is performed according to a predetermined effect table, the currently performed effect is stopped. , The effect corresponding to the newly received command is started.

<Regarding V interrupt processing executed by the display control device 111>
Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 113 in the display control device 111 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is activated by the MPU 113 at regular intervals (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec).

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether a new command has been received. If a new command has been received, data table selection processing is executed in step S1202. The data table is an information group in which processing necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing is displayed when a moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Is.

By the way, when the MPU 113 of the display control device 111 receives a command relating to a new selection of a data table in a situation where display control is performed according to a predetermined data table, the MPU 113 cancels the current display effect and The display effect corresponding to the newly received command is started.

When a negative determination is made in step S1201 or after the process of step S1202 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer updating process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. As a result, it becomes possible for the MPU 113 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

In the following step S1204, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, the type of image data necessary for issuing a drawing instruction to the VDP 116 is grasped, and the parameter applied to the grasped image data is set. Calculate.

After that, the drawing list output process is executed in step S1205, and then the V interrupt process is terminated. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing according to this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 116. In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target in the video RAM 118, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 116 reads necessary image data from the character ROM 117 according to this drawing list, and sets the read image data in the frame buffer of the video RAM 118 while applying the above parameters. As a result, drawing data for one frame is created. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 41 according to the created drawing data, so that an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

Here, commands received by the MPU 113 of the display control device 111 from the sound emission control device 72 include a stop result command and a pattern command. When these commands are received, in step S1202, a data table required for executing the game rehabilitation effect corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 41 is selected. In this case, the moving image of the game reproduction effect is displayed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72, and the display content corresponds to the current effect mode. Further, in the video for game reproduction effect, the stop result determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 is finally stopped and displayed.

When the common symbol determination process is executed by the MPU 102, the timing at which the common symbol combination is displayed is limited to the timing at which the variable display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the game-use effect ends. There is no need to do so, and for example, a common symbol combination may be displayed during the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and a common symbol combination may be displayed during the reach display. May be displayed, or a common combination of symbols may be displayed after the indication that the reach display has been removed, and the combination of the symbols that are normally out may be stopped and displayed. After that, a combination of common symbols may be displayed.

Further, as the received command, there is a command for the open/close execution mode. When the command is received, in step S1202, the data table necessary for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the command on the symbol display device 41 is selected. Specifically, as described above, the command for the opening/closing execution mode includes the effect A1 system command, the effect A2 system command, the effect A3 command, the effect A4 command, and the effect B command. The data table corresponding to each of these commands is selected. Further, since the production A1 system command and the production A2 system command include information corresponding to the lottery result of the production mode lottery process (step S1102 or step S1107), the data table of the production A1 system and the production A2 system As the data table, a data table corresponding to each lottery result is selected.

The data table of effect A1, the data table of effect A2, and the data table of effect A3 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 23A shows the data table of the effect A1, FIG. 23B shows the data table of the effect A2, and FIG. 23C shows the data table of the effect A3.

As shown in FIGS. 23(a) to 23(c), in each data table, information on the number of frames, which is information indicating the number of frames from when the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is started, Information of the usage data group used in each frame is set in a one-to-one correspondence. In this case, as described above, the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A in which the effect A1 or the effect A3 is selected and the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B in which the effect A2 is selected are start timings. There is a section in which the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is common from to the timing in the middle. Further, in the common section, the opening mode of the big winning opening 32a is a short time mode in which the winning of the game balls does not substantially occur or the winning of the upper limit number of the game balls does not substantially occur, so that the common section is exhausted. The time required for does not change according to the winning situation to the special winning opening 32a. Corresponding to the existence of the common section, common effects are achieved in each of the data tables in FIGS. 23A to 23C.

That is, the same use data group is set up to the number of frames F(1) to F(q-x-1), and as shown in FIG. The production is performed so as to predict which one of the high-degree production mode and the high-expectation production mode will be used. Further, the same use data group is set in the subsequent frame numbers F(q-x) to F(q-y-1), and as shown in FIG. The effect that the transfer destination has been determined is performed. In this case, in the effects A1 and A2, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the effect mode lottery process (step S1102 or step S1107) is displayed as the transfer destination. In the production A3, the high-expectation production mode is displayed as the transition destination. The number of frames F(1) to F(q-y-1) corresponds to the common effect, and the timing at which the common effect ends is the end timing of the common section.

Note that the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which the common effect ends may be before or after the end timing of the common section. However, in linking the common section according to the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 and the common effect according to the display mode of the symbol display device 41, overlapping the periods in which both are performed so that the player can recognize that they are the same. Is preferred.

On the other hand, after the number of frames F(q-y), images corresponding to each effect are displayed. That is, in the effect A1, the effect in the state in which the transition destination is determined is performed up to the final frame F(q).

Further, in the effect A2, in the number of frames F(q-y) to F(q), first, as shown in FIG. 23(C), an effect indicating that a further effect is developed in the opening/closing execution mode is generated. After that, as shown in FIG. 23(D), an effect indicating that it is the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B is performed. After that, a predetermined effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is performed until the final frame F(r).

Further, in the effect A3, in the number of frames F(q-y) to F(q), first, as shown in FIG. 23(C), an effect indicating that further effect is developed in the opening/closing execution mode. As shown in FIG. 23(E) after that, it is shown that the game result that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the explicit high-probability jackpot result A, or whether or not after the opening/closing execution mode. An effect indicating that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode is performed.

By the way, the data table of the effect A4 is set so that the same effect as in the case of the effect A2 is performed for the number of frames F(1) to F(q), but the effect after that is effect A2. It is set so that an effect different from that in the above case is performed. In the data table of effect B, the common effect is not set, and effects different from any of effects A1 to A4 are performed.

Further, as the command to be received, there is a premium command. When the command is received, in step S1202, characters and characters corresponding to the premium effect are added to the image according to the currently set opening/closing execution mode data table. Further, as the received command, there is a teaching effect command. When the command is received, in step S1202, a process of switching the currently set open/close execution mode data table to the teaching effect data table is executed. As a result, the display effect of the execution target is switched from the effect A1 to the teaching effect, and the image in which the character or the character corresponding to the teaching effect appears is displayed.

<About the content of the game result>
Next, the contents of various game results defined by executing the above various processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

As shown in FIG. 24, the game results set in the pachinko machine 10 other than the normal deviation result are a low-probability jackpot result A, a low-probability jackpot result B, a low-probability jackpot result C, and an implicit high-probability jackpot result A. , Unspecified high-probability jackpot result B, explicit high-probability jackpot result A, explicit high-probability jackpot result B, explicit high-probability jackpot result C, most advantageous jackpot result, and special outlier result.

Of these game results, various jackpot results are game results selected when the winning/winning lottery results in winning, and the special out-of-range results are game results selected when the winning/winning lottery does not result in winning. Further, the various jackpot results are different from the special miss result, and are the game results that trigger the transition for either the winning/winning lottery mode or the support mode, but the transition modes are different as shown in FIG. 24. ..

Each game result listed in FIG. 24 serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, but the contents of the opening/closing execution mode of the shifting destination are different in a predetermined combination and individually. The contents of each of the open/close execution modes will be described below with reference to FIG. 25 in addition to FIG. FIG. 25 is a timing chart for explaining the contents of each open/close execution mode. In addition, in FIG. 25, the case where the winning of the upper limit number of game balls to the special winning opening 32a does not occur in each round game of the round number defining mode is shown.

First, the case where the opening/closing execution mode of pattern D is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern D that shifts by using either the low-probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result as a trigger, shift to the round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times. However, in each round game, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed once for a long time. This allows the player to receive a large amount of game balls.

Next, a case where the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A is executed will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25(a), in the low-probability jackpot result A, the implicit high-probability jackpot result A, and the explicit high-probability jackpot result A, a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times. In each round game, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed once in a short time mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, in the special disengagement result, the opening/closing number defining mode is switched to the round number defining mode, and the special winning opening 32a is opened/closed 15 times in a short time mode.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, the special winning opening 32a is opened/closed only in a short time, the number of times is 15, and the total opening/closing number of the special winning opening 32a is 15. In this way, by opening and closing the special winning opening 32a only in a short time period, even if the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is entered, the payout of game balls to the player does not substantially occur. Therefore, the opening/closing execution mode can be executed as a kind of effect that does not substantially increase the player's outgoing ball.

In the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, not only the opening/closing mode of the special winning opening 32a but also the waiting time for opening, the time between consecutive opening/closing operations, and the waiting time for ending are the same. Therefore, when the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, the operation of the variable winning a prize device 32 is similar to the appearance regardless of the game result which is the trigger of the change, and any game from the operation of the variable award winning device 32. It is not possible for the player to know whether the result was an opportunity.

By the way, the pachinko machine 10 does not have a dedicated display section indicating that it is in the round number defining mode, and the upper limit number of rounds in the round number defining mode is all the same. There is no dedicated display section that indicates the number of times that is performed. Therefore, even if it is attempted to ascertain whether the mode is the round number specifying mode or the opening/closing number specifying mode on the basis of the dedicated display section, it is impossible.

As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25(A), the symbol display device 41 is displayed in the symbol display device 41 at a game time which is one of a low-probability jackpot result A, a non-explicit high-probability jackpot result A, an explicit high-probability jackpot result A, and a special miss result. A combination of common symbols is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25(B) to FIG. 25(C), the effect in the opening/closing execution mode from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode to at least the middle timing Are also common. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, which game result is the trigger until at least the middle timing, even if the production including the display content of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed? Can't figure out. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, the player can play the game while predicting which game result has triggered the game. In FIG. 25, the effect as shown in FIG. 25(B) is performed until the timing of t1, and the effect as shown in FIG. 25(C) is performed from the timing of t1.

Here, when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support modes up to that point. Therefore, for example, in the case of the low frequency support mode, when the result A of the explicit high-precision jackpot is A and the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is entered, and the player Can recognize that the game result that triggered the transition is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A.

In response to such a situation, when the explicit high certainty jackpot result A is obtained, from the timing of t2 when the last opening/closing in the opening/closing execution mode ends until the waiting time for ending elapses, FIG. A finalized effect as shown in (D) and FIG. 25(E) is performed. As a result, when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is reached, the player is allowed to predict which game result has triggered the game until the middle of the opening/closing execution mode, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A from the middle. It is possible to teach that Further, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is performed, the player plays the game while expecting that the finalized effect is performed, and the attention of the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be improved. it can. Furthermore, since the timing at which the finalized effect is started is the timing at which the last opening/closing of the variable winning device 32 ends, it is possible to know from the opening/closing mode of the variable winning device 32 which game result has triggered. It is possible to achieve the effect by performing the finalized effect without losing the effect of performing.

On the other hand, when the low-probability jackpot result A, the implicit high-probability jackpot result A, and the special out-of-court result trigger the transition, the support mode up to that point is continued. Furthermore, when these game results trigger the transition, the effects in the opening/closing execution mode are common from the start timing to the ending timing of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, when the low-probability jackpot result A, the imprecise high-probability jackpot result A, and the special miss result trigger the transition, the player sets the win/loss lottery mode to either the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether or not, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game after the opening/closing execution mode.

However, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special deviation result, unlike the cases of low-probability jackpot result A and implicit high-probability jackpot result A, the opening/closing number regulation mode is executed instead of the round number regulation mode. Thereby, depending on the winning mode of the game ball to the special winning opening 32a in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, the player can judge whether or not the game result triggered by the winning is the special out-of-match result. .. Such contents will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

26(a) and 26(b) show the case where the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A is executed triggered by the special disconnection result, and FIG. 26(c) shows the opening/closing of pattern A triggered by one of the jackpot results. The case where the execution mode is executed is shown. 26(a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) show the opening state of the special winning opening 32a, and FIGS. 26(a-2), (b-2), and (c-2). ) Indicates the winning situation of the game ball into the special winning opening 32a.

A case in which the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disengagement result is completed with the opening of the special winning opening 32a being performed the upper limit number of times will be described with reference to FIG.

On the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the common opening as shown in FIG. 26(A) is already started, and at the timing of t11, the first opening of the special winning opening 32a in the short time mode is started. To be done. After that, the special winning opening 32a is repeatedly opened and closed in the short time mode, and at the timing of t13 when the 12th opening is started, the content of the common effect progresses to the content shown in FIG. 26B. To do. Then, at the timing of t14, the final opening of the special winning opening 32a ends, and the waiting time for the ending comes.

In this case, the winning at the special winning opening 32a has occurred once at the timing of t12, but no winning at the special winning opening 32a has occurred. Since the upper limit number of the opening/closing number defining mode is set to 2 as described above, the opening/closing execution mode ends when the special winning opening 32a is opened for the upper limit number of times.

A case will be described with reference to FIG. 26B, in which the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disengagement result ends with the winning of the upper limit number of game balls to the special winning opening 32a.

On the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the first opening of the special winning opening 32a in the short time mode is started at the timing of t21 which is a situation where the common effect as shown in FIG. 26(A) has already started. To be done. After that, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is repeated in the short time mode, but at the timing of t22, the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 32a occurs once, and the final opening of the special winning opening 32a starts. At the timing of t23, which is a timing before that, the second winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 32a occurs.

In this case, since the ending condition for the upper limit number of winnings of the game balls to the special winning opening 32a is satisfied, the final opening of the special winning opening 32a is not started, but the waiting time for the ending. Be started. Further, at the timing of t23, the common effect is stopped on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the teaching effect as shown in FIG. 26(C) is started.

A case in which the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed triggered by the jackpot result will be described with reference to FIG.

On the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the common opening as shown in FIG. 26(A) has already started, at the timing of t31, the first opening of the special winning opening 32a in the short time mode starts. To be done. After that, opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is repeated in the short time mode.

In this case, the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 32a occurs once at each of the timing of t32, the timing of t33, and the timing of t34. However, this time it is the round number regulation mode, the maximum number is reset for each round game, and the big winning opening 32a is opened only once in each round game, so the winning of the game ball as described above Even if it occurs three times, the opening/closing execution mode does not end.

Incidentally, in the twelfth opening of the special winning opening 32a, the display content on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the content shown in FIG. 26(B) as in the case of FIG. 26(a). To be done.

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special disengagement result, when the maximum number of game balls for the special winning opening 32a is won, the number of opening/closing that is ended regardless of the number of times the special winning opening 32a has been opened/closed. It becomes the regulation mode. Further, the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of times for opening the special winning opening 32a. Therefore, the number of times of opening the special winning opening 32a varies depending on the occurrence status of the winning for the special winning opening 32a. As a result, the player opens and closes by confirming that the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a is less than the upper limit number (that is, less than the number of times corresponding to the common section) by continuing to shoot the game balls in the common section. It is possible to clearly understand that the game result that triggered the execution of the execution mode is the special miss result.

By the way, it can be said that the upper limit number in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disengagement result is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number which is the ending condition of 1 of the round game. In other words, the total number of the upper limit numbers in the common section in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result is the upper limit number of the common sections in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result. It is set to a number less than the total number.

When the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special disengagement result ends without the number of times of opening/closing of the special winning opening 32a reaching the upper limit number, the common effect is stopped on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Teaching effect is started. As a result, even if the player has not confirmed the number of times of opening/closing the special winning opening 32a, if the opening/closing execution mode ends without the number of opening/closing of the special winning opening 32a reaching the upper limit number, the player will It is possible to clearly understand that

In addition, when the number of game balls entered reaches the upper limit in the final opening of the variable winning device 32 in the common section, the teaching effect is not executed. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the manner in which the game balls enter the variable winning device 32 and the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in the configuration in which the teaching effect is provided. It should be noted that, in such a configuration, when the special winning opening 32a is opened in the short time mode, the opening duration is at least immediately after the opening in the short time mode is started and the winning of one game ball occurs. It is more effective to apply to a configuration in which the time is longer than the time at which a person can recognize that the time is longer than the opening duration when the opening is terminated with the above.

In addition, the player who knows the upper limit number of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special disengagement result continues to shoot the game ball in the common section and the winning number to the special winning opening 32a is generated by the upper limit number. Nevertheless, by confirming that the special winning opening 32a continues to be opened and closed, it is possible to clearly understand that the opening/closing execution mode is not triggered by the result of special outlier, but by the result of jackpot. be able to.

Further, in the common section, since the big winning opening 32a is opened in a short time mode, the winning of the upper limit number of game balls does not always occur even if the game balls are continuously fired. The probability that the upper limit number of game balls will be won is lower than the probability that the game balls will not be won. Therefore, when the low-probability jackpot result A, the implicit high-probability jackpot result A, and the special miss result trigger the transition, while predicting which win/loss lottery mode will be set after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the game is played. It is possible to increase the feeling of superiority of the player when it is possible to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the special disconnection result, while enabling the game to be performed.

Next, a case where the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25(b), in the low-probability jackpot result B, the implicit high-probability jackpot result B, and the explicit high-probability jackpot result B, a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times. In total, in the first round of the first round and the second round of the second round from the start timing, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed 16 times in the short time mode. That is, the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game. In other words, in one round game, the phenomenon that the special winning opening 32a is changed from the open state to the closed state and subsequently is changed to the open state occurs at least once. By the way, when the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game as described above, the upper limit duration which is one end condition of the round game is the open duration in each short time mode, The time is the same as or slightly longer than the sum of the waiting time between a plurality of continuous opening/closing operations. In each round game of the 3rd to 15th rounds, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed once for a long time.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B, the big winning opening 32a is first opened and closed 16 times in a short time mode, and then the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed 13 times in a long time mode. The total number of times the winning opening 32a is opened and closed is 29 times. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, the payout of the game balls to the player does not substantially occur from the start timing to the middle timing, but after the middle timing, a large amount of the game balls to the player Payout occurs. However, the payout amount of the game balls expected to be obtained in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is smaller than that in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern D.

The opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is not only the opening/closing mode of the special winning opening 32a, but also the waiting time for opening, the time between consecutive opening/closing operations, and the waiting time for ending are the same between the game results that trigger the transition. Has become. Therefore, when the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, the operation of the variable winning a prize device 32 is similar to the appearance regardless of the game result which is the trigger of the change, and any game from the operation of the variable award winning device 32. It is not possible for the player to know whether the result was a trigger.

As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25(A), a symbol common to the symbol display device 41 in the game times that is one of the low-probability jackpot result B, the implicit high-probability jackpot result B, and the explicit high-probability jackpot result B. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the effect in the opening/closing execution mode is common from the start timing to the ending timing of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed, even if the production including the display content of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed, it is grasped during the opening/closing execution mode which game result is the trigger. Can not do it. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed, the player can play the game while predicting which game result has triggered the game.

When either the low-probability jackpot result B or the imprecise high-probability jackpot result B triggers the transition, the support mode up to that point is continued. Therefore, when either the low-probability jackpot result B or the imprecise high-probability jackpot result B triggers the transition, which of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode is the winning/winning lottery mode set for the player? It is possible to play the game while predicting, and it is possible to improve the attention degree of the game after the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the first round of the number-of-rounds mode, when the winning of the special winning opening 32a occurs in a situation where the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a is a short time mode. Although the premium effect will be executed, the operation of executing the premium effect in relation to the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 27.

27A shows a case where the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed triggered by the low-probability jackpot result B or the implicit high-probability jackpot result B, and FIG. 27B shows the explicit high-probability jackpot result B as a trigger. Shows the case where the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B is executed. 27(a-1) and 27(b-1) show the execution status of the round game, and FIGS. 27(a-2) and 27(b-2) show the opening status of the special winning opening 32a. (A-3), (b-3) shows the winning situation of the game ball into the special winning opening 32a.

A case where the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed triggered by the low-probability jackpot result B or the implicit high-probability jackpot result B and the premium effect is not executed will be described with reference to FIG. ..

On the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the first round game is started at the timing of t11, which is the situation where the common effect as shown in FIG. 27(A) has already started, and at the special winning opening 32a. The first opening is started in the short time mode. After that, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is repeated in the short time mode, and the opening of the eighth game is finished at the timing of t12 and the first round game is finished.

After that, at the timing of t13, the second round game is started, and the ninth winning opening in the short-time mode at the special winning opening 32a is started. After that, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is repeated in the short time period, and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 32a occurs at the timing of t14 which is the tenth opening. However, since the premium effect is executed on condition that it is the first round in the round number defining mode, the premium effect is not executed when the winning at the timing of t14 is used as an opportunity.

After that, at the timing of t15, the content of the common effect progresses to the content as shown in FIG. 27(B), and at the timing of t16, the fixed effect as shown in FIG. 27(C) is started. Then, at the timing of t17, the 16th opening is completed and the 2R round game is completed. After the 2R round game is completed, the 3R and subsequent round games in which the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long time mode are performed.

A case where the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed triggered by the explicit high certainty jackpot result B and the premium effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

On the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the 1R round game is started at the timing of t21 which is a situation where the common effect as shown in FIG. 27(A) has already been started, and at the special winning opening 32a. The first opening is started in the short time mode. After that, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is repeated in the short time mode, and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 32a occurs at the timing of t22 which is the tenth opening.

In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the low-probability jackpot result B or the implicitly high-probability jackpot result B, the 10th opening time corresponds to the 2R round game as described with reference to FIG. 27A. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high certainty jackpot result B, the 10th opening time corresponds to the 1R round game. Therefore, at the timing of t22, as shown in FIG. 27D, the special character CH is displayed as a premium effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

After that, at the timing of t23, the content of the common effect progresses to the content as shown in FIG. 27(B), and at the timing of t24, the fixed effect as shown in FIG. 27(C) is started. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, the display of the special character CH ends at the timing of t23, but instead of this, even if the contents of the common effect have progressed or the confirmed effect has started, the special character CH is special. The character CH may be displayed continuously. That is, the premium effect may be continued even if the content of the common effect has progressed or the fixed effect has been started. With such a configuration, the possibility that the player may miss the premium effect is reduced.

After that, at the timing of t25, the opening of the 15th special winning opening 32a is completed and the first round game is completed. Also, at the timing of t26, the second round game is started to start the 16th opening in the short time mode in the special winning opening 32a, and at the timing of t27, the opening of the special winning opening 32a is finished and the 2R The round game of the eyes is over.

As described above, in the first round of the number-of-rounds specifying mode, the premium effect is executed when the winning of the special winning opening 32a occurs in a situation where the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a is a short time mode. In the above, the number of times of opening and closing in the short time mode continuing from the start timing is the same, but the number of times of opening and closing in the short time mode assigned to the 1R round game is the case of the explicit high certainty jackpot result B Is larger than in the case of the low-probability jackpot result B and the implicit high-probability jackpot result B. As a result, the probability that the premium effect is executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is higher than in the case where either the low-accuracy jackpot result B or the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is triggered. Can be increased. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B occurs, it is unclear which jackpot result is a trigger from the aspect of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode excluding the premium effect and the aspect of the special winning opening 32a. When the premiere effect is performed, it is possible to predict that the possibility of the explicit high certainty jackpot result B is relatively high.

In addition, in the short time mode from the start timing to the eighth time, no winning of the special winning opening 32a has occurred, and in the short time mode of the ninth time or later, the winning of the special winning opening 32a has occurred. It is possible for the player who has confirmed that the above-mentioned has been performed to clearly recognize that the opening/closing execution mode currently being executed is triggered by the explicit high-precision jackpot result B as an execution trigger.

By the way, between the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B and the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the low-accuracy jackpot result B and the non-explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode. In a section (hereinafter, also referred to as a predetermined section) commonly executed in a manner that the opening and closing are similar in appearance (that is, in a low discrimination mode), the special winning opening 32a is basically opened 16 times. However, according to the winning mode to the variable winning device 32, the predetermined section is relatively easy to be shortened in the former opening/closing execution mode, whereas the predetermined section is relatively short in the latter opening/closing execution mode. Hard to shorten.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-precision jackpot result B, the special winning opening 32a is opened/closed 15 times in a short time mode in the first round game included in the predetermined section, and the second round is opened. In the round game, the opening/closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed once in a short time period, so that the total number of times of opening/closing in the predetermined section is 16 times. In this case, the upper limit number to the variable winning device 32 is 9 which is a sufficient condition for ending each round game. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 is less than the upper limit number of opening/closing of the variable winning device 32 in some round games among the plurality of round games included in the predetermined section. It has become a number.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the low-probability jackpot result B and the implicit high-probability jackpot result B, the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed eight times in a short time mode in the first round game included in the predetermined section. In addition, the total number of times of opening and closing in the predetermined section is 16 times by opening and closing the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode in the second round game. In this case, the upper limit number to the variable winning device 32 is 9 which is a sufficient condition to end each round game as described above. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 exceeds the upper limit number of opening/closing of the variable winning device 32 in all of the plurality of round games included in the predetermined section.

Since the predetermined section of each opening/closing execution mode is set as described above, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-precision jackpot result B, the special winning opening 32a is opened once in the short time mode at the 1st R. When one game ball is won each time it is played, the predetermined section ends without opening and closing 16 times, which is the common maximum opening and closing times. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the low-probability jackpot result B and the implicitly high-probability jackpot result B, the special winning opening 32a is opened once in a short time mode in the 1R and 2R round games. Even if one game ball is won each time, 16 times of opening and closing, which is the common maximum number of times of opening and closing, are performed in a predetermined section.

That is, the probability that the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a in the predetermined section does not reach the maximum number of times of opening and closing according to the winning mode of the game ball is lower when the explicit high-precision jackpot result B is used as a trigger. It will be higher than when the result B and the implicit high-precision jackpot result B are used as a trigger. As a result, by confirming whether or not the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a in the short time period has reached the maximum number of times of opening and closing when the maximum number of winnings for the round game has occurred in the predetermined section, which game result It is possible to understand to a certain extent whether or not this was triggered by.

Next, a case where the opening/closing execution mode of pattern C is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25(c), in the explicit high certainty jackpot result C, a transition is made to a round number defining mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit number, and a short time mode in the 1R round game. After the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed 18 times, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed once in the medium time mode. That is, not only is the special winning opening 32a opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game, but the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed in different types of opening modes during one round game. By the way, when the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game as described above, the upper limit duration which is one end condition of the round game is the open duration in each short time mode, It is the same as or slightly longer than the time of the sum of the open duration time in the medium time mode and the standby time between a plurality of consecutive opening/closing operations. In each round game of the 2nd to 15th rounds, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed once for a long time.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, the special winning opening 32a is first opened/closed 18 times in a short time mode, and subsequently, the special winning opening 32a is opened/closed once in a medium time mode. After that, since the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed 14 times in a long time mode, the total number of opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is 33 times. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, the payout of the game balls to the player does not substantially occur from the start timing to the middle timing, but after the middle timing, a large amount of the game balls to the player Payout occurs. In this case, the payout amount of the game balls expected to be obtained is the same as in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern D.

Next, comparison of the open/close execution modes of patterns A to C will be described.

In both the case where the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A is executed and the case where the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B is executed, the high probability mode may be set as the win/loss lottery mode, and the low probability mode is set. Sometimes. However, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the pattern is higher than the probability that the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result A and the explicit high-probability jackpot result A are selected from among the various game results that trigger the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A. Of the various game results that trigger the opening/closing execution mode of B, the probability that either the implicit high-precision big hit result B or the explicit high-precision big hit result B is selected is set high. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode, as compared with the case where the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed. ..

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) to 25(c), in any of the case of pattern A, the case of pattern B, and the case of pattern C, the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode from the start timing is displayed. Opening and closing is performed 15 times continuously. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a common combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the game times corresponding to the pattern A to pattern C, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 25(C), the effects in the opening/closing execution mode are common from the start timing until the special winning opening 32a is opened/closed 15 times in a short time mode. As a result, when opening/closing of the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode is started, the player predicts whether the opening/closing execution mode is pattern A to pattern C from the start timing to the midway timing. You can play while playing.

Further, in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B, after the start timing, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed in a short time sequence 15 times in succession, and after the common section is finished, the special winning opening 32a is further opened in a short time manner. It is opened and closed once. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern C, after the start timing, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed 15 times in a row in a short time sequence, and after the common section is completed, the special winning opening 32a is opened in a shorter time. It is opened and closed three times. As a result, the player can recognize which of the opening and closing execution modes of patterns A to C by counting the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a in a short time period from the start timing. .. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, in the opening/closing execution modes of the pattern B and the pattern C, as shown in FIGS. 25D and 25F, from the timing t2 when the last opening/closing in the common section with the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is completed. A finalized effect of a different pattern B or pattern C is performed. As a result, when one of the open/close execution modes of the pattern B and the pattern C is set, the player predicts which open/close execution mode the common section has elapsed from the start timing of the open/close execution mode. It is possible to teach that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B or the pattern C from the middle. Further, in the common section, the player plays the game while expecting that the finalized effect will be performed, so that the attention of the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be improved. Furthermore, since the timing at which the finalized effect is started is the timing at which the last opening/closing of the variable winning device 32 ends, it is difficult to know which opening/closing execution mode the opening/closing mode of the variable winning device 32 is. It is possible to achieve the effect by the above-mentioned finalized effect without losing the effect.

By the way, by opening and closing the special winning opening 32a multiple times during one round game in the opening and closing execution mode of the pattern B, in a configuration in which the upper limit number of round games is the same, it continues from the start timing. While the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a is common to the case of the pattern A and the case of the pattern B, the special winning opening 32a can be opened/closed for a long time in the pattern B after the common opening mode.

Also, in the opening and closing execution mode of the pattern C, the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times during one round game, and after the opening and closing in the short time mode is completed, it is possible to switch to the opening and closing in the medium time mode. By doing so, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of round games is the same, after opening the common opening mode, the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a continuous from the start timing is common to the case of pattern A to pattern B. It is possible to win the upper limit number of game balls during the same round game.

<External output from pachinko machine 10 to hall computer HC>
Next, the configuration of the external output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed.

As shown in FIG. 28, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. Further, in the island facility S, a data counter DC is installed so as to correspond to each pachinko machine 10 on a one-to-one basis. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, and has a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times of execution of the game, and a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of execution of a predetermined opening/closing execution mode. Two display parts DC2 are provided.

A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as management control means for managing each pachinko machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and the MPU 201 is mounted therein. The MPU 201 temporarily stores various data such as various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and various data and information input from the pachinko machine 10 when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. RAM 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing the data.

The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through the electric wiring group EL2. Then, the management process based on the information received from each pachinko machine 10 is executed, and a signal corresponding to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

Here, a configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 29A is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 showing the external terminal board 81 and its periphery in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 29B illustrates the external output buffer 94d provided in the RAM 94 of the main controller 71. 29C is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the external terminal board 81. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the external terminal board 81 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals) 81a to 81h. A total of eight external terminals 81a to 81h are provided, and the types of information output to the hall computer HC to the outside are different.

The jackpot external terminal 81a is used to output information (winning information or a winning signal) indicating that it is in the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot winning of the main control device 71. The external terminal 81b for the opening/closing execution mode is information indicating that it is in the opening/closing execution mode based on the fact that the jackpot win of the main control unit 71 has been won or the special failure result (opening/closing execution information or opening/closing). It is used to output the execution signal). The conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is in the opening/closing execution mode of any one of the patterns B to D, or the jackpot is won in the win/loss lottery, and the support mode of the electric accessory 34a becomes the high-frequency support mode after the completion. It is used to output information (conditional winning information or conditional winning signal) indicating that the set opening/closing execution mode is in progress.

The jackpot external terminal 81a, the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c are all used to output information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in effect. The conditions for outputting are different.

In particular, the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is triggered by a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended, or when the opening/closing execution mode ends. Is set as the above condition. Therefore, no information is output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c during the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of the extraordinary loss, and the low-probability jackpot result A is further obtained in the low-frequency support mode. Alternatively, information is not output from the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot even during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result A of the implicit high-precision jackpot. As a result, when it is possible for the player to recognize that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is different from that triggered by the special miss result, the special miss result is triggered while the information is externally output. When it is impossible to recognize that it is different from the one, it is possible to provide a terminal that does not output information externally to the game hall.

The external terminals 81a to 81h include, in addition to the external terminals 81a to 81c, an external terminal 81d for a support mode used to output information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, External terminal 81e for the number of games used to output information indicating that the game number of the game is finished, and an external terminal used to output information indicating that a prize has been awarded to the operating ports 33, 34. 81f, an external terminal 81g used to output information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out, and an external terminal 81g used to output information indicating that a predetermined fraud has been detected. The external terminal 81h is included. The types of the external terminals 81a to 81h are not limited to those described above, and for example, the external terminals used to output information indicating that the gaming machine body 12 is open and the front door frame 14 are provided. There may be provided an external terminal used for outputting information indicating that the is open.

A plurality of unit areas 121 to 128 for output setting are provided in the external output buffer 94d of the RAM 94 of the main control device 71 in one-to-one correspondence with the external terminals 81a to 81h. Each of the output setting unit areas 121 to 128 has an information amount of a predetermined bit, specifically, 1 bit, and each of the unit areas 121 to 128 has "0" which is output non-existence information and output. Any one of the information “1” is set. The amount of information in each of the unit areas 121 to 128 is not limited to 1 bit, and is arbitrary, and the data configurations of the no output information and the output present information are also arbitrary.

The main controller 71 is electrically connected to the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal board 81 in a one-to-one correspondence with each other through the electric wiring group EL3 shown in FIG. A signal of a predetermined voltage is output to the external terminals 81a to 81h corresponding to the unit areas 121 to 128 in which "1" is set.

As shown in FIG. 29C, each of the external terminals 81a to 81h enables transmission of an electric signal from the main control device 71 to the hall computer HC, and at the same time prevents the reverse flow of the photo coupler 131. It is composed by. The light emitting diode 132 which is the primary side of the photocoupler 131 is connected to the main control device 71 via the resistor 133, and the light receiving element (phototransistor) 134 which is the secondary side is connected to the hall computer HC. Therefore, when a signal is output from the main control device 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81h corresponding to the unit areas 121 to 128 for which "1" is set in the external output buffer 94d, the signal output is made to the outside. The light emitting diode 132 of the terminals 81a to 81h emits light, the light is received by the light receiving element 134 of the external terminals 81a to 81h, converted into an electric signal, and the electric signal is output to the hall computer HC.

The mode of the electric signal output to the hall computer HC is arbitrary, and a signal of 0V is output from the main control device 71 in a situation where no external output is made, and the external output makes a predetermined value larger than 0V. The voltage output signal may be output, or the signal output pattern may have an inverse relationship. Further, in a situation where the main control device 71 does not output an external signal, a signal having a reference voltage greater than 0 V is output, and by performing the external output, a signal having a voltage higher or lower than the reference voltage is output. May be

<Regarding External Output Processing Executed by Main Controller 71>
Next, a process related to external output executed by the main controller 71 will be described. However, in the following description, among the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal board 81, an external terminal 81a for jackpot, an external terminal 81b for open/close execution mode, an external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot and a support mode. A configuration related to external output through the external terminal 81d will be mainly described.

The processing for starting external output through the jackpot external terminal 81a, the opening/closing execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is included in the game state transition processing (FIG. 15) already described. Specifically, it is the external output setting process at the time of mode transition in step S511 and the external output setting process for delay in step S512. These two external output setting processes have different execution timings, and the external output setting process at the time of mode transition in step S511 is executed when the open/close execution mode is started, and the external output setting process for delay in step S512 is opened/closed. It is repeatedly executed after the start of the execution mode.

<External output setting process at mode transition>
First, the external output setting process at the time of mode transition will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results. If the result is one of the jackpots, in step S1302, "1" is set in the first unit area 121 corresponding to the jackpot external terminal 81a in the external output buffer 94d, and at the same time the opening/closing execution mode external "1" is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the terminal 81b. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b is started, and each terminal 81a, It is possible to output the information associated with 81b to the hall computer HC.

On the other hand, if none of the jackpot results are obtained, that is, if the special outlier result is used as an opportunity, “1” is set only in the second unit area 122 in step S1303. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the external terminal 81b for the open/close execution mode is started, and the output of information associated with the terminal 81b is stopped. It is possible to do this for the computer HC.

After executing the processing of step S1302 or step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot result or the low-probability jackpot result C. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1304, then in step S1305, after setting "1" to the third unit area 123 corresponding to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot in the external output buffer 94d, this external output The setting process ends. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started, and the output of information associated with the terminal 81c is stopped. It is possible to do this for the computer HC.

When a negative determination is made in step S1304, in step S1306, the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the low-probability jackpot result B, the implicit high-probability jackpot result B, the explicit high-probability jackpot result A. , Explicit high-probability jackpot result B or explicit high-probability jackpot result C is determined. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1306, the output delay flag is set in the RAM 94 and "12950" is set in the delay timer counter DT provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S1307. After that, the external output setting process ends.

The output delay flag is information for the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 to recognize that the start of external output via the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is delayed. Further, the delay timer counter DT is a counter for the MPU 92 to know at what timing the situation in which the start of the external output via the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is delayed is canceled. The numerical information set in the delay timer counter DT is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated, so the delay time (delay period) set in step S1307. Is 25.9 sec. This time is the same as or substantially the same as the time required from the start timing to the end of the common section in the opening/closing execution mode of patterns A to C. The effect of this will be described later in detail.

When a negative determination is made in step S1306, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a special out-of-game result. If it is the special deviation result, the external output setting processing is ended as it is. If it is not the special outlier result, that is, if it is the low-probability jackpot result A or the implicit high-probability jackpot result A, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. In the situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggers the opening/closing execution mode has been reached. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the external output setting processing is ended after executing the processing of step S1307 already described. If a negative determination is made in step S1309, the external output setting processing is performed as it is. To finish.

<External output setting process for delay>
Next, the external output setting process for delay will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether the output delay flag is set in the RAM 94. When the output delay flag is not set, this external output setting process is ended as it is. If the output delay flag is set, it is determined in step S1402 whether the numerical information of the delay timer counter DT is "0". That is, it is determined whether the delay time has elapsed. If the delay timer counter DT is not "0", the external output setting process is ended as it is. When the delay timer counter DT is "0", the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, "1" is set in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started, and the output of information associated with the terminal 81c is stopped. It is possible to do this for the computer HC. After that, in step S1404, after the output delay flag set in the RAM 94 is cleared, the external output setting process is ended.

<External output cancellation processing>
Next, the external output cancellation processing executed in step S413 of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 14) will be described.

In the external output canceling process, a process of setting the information of the first unit area 121 to the third unit area 123 in the external output buffer 94d to "0" is executed. As a result, when a signal is output to the jackpot external terminal 81a, when a signal is output to the opening/closing execution mode external terminal 81b, a conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is output. When the signal output for the target is being performed, the signal output is stopped in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12).

Here, the external output cancellation processing is executed in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 14) as described above, and the fluctuation start processing is executed when a new game time is started. That is, a state in which a signal is output to the external jack 81a for jackpot, a state in which a signal is output to the external terminal 81b for open/close execution mode, and an external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot. The state in which the directed signal output is being performed is not released when the corresponding opening/closing execution mode ends, but is released when the first game time is started after the opening/closing execution mode. By performing the release as described above, it becomes possible to secure a long signal output period from each of the external terminals 81a to 81c. Further, since it is canceled when the first game time is started, it is possible to secure the signal output period within a range where there is no problem in managing the pachinko machine 10.

The release timing is not limited to the above, and may be released at the end of the open/close execution mode, for example, a predetermined period before or after a predetermined period based on the open/close execution mode end timing. The configuration may be canceled.

<Support mode external output setting processing>
Next, the external output setting process of the support mode executed in steps S905 and S915 of the transition process (FIG. 19) at the end of the open/close execution mode will be described.

In the external output setting process of the support mode, the process of setting the information of the fourth unit area 124 in the external output buffer 94d to "1" is executed. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output to the external terminal 81d for the support mode is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81d is performed by the hall computer. It is possible to do this for the HC. In this case, the timing for executing the external output setting process for the support mode is the timing for ending the open/close execution mode.

Further, the state in which "1" is set in the fourth unit area 124 is canceled by the external output canceling process (step S516) in the support mode in the game state shifting process (FIG. 15). In the external output cancellation processing, if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results, the state in which "1" is set in the fourth unit area 124 is canceled, and If the result is a failure, the cancellation is not performed. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered on the basis of one of the jackpot results, the signal output to the port mode external terminal 81d is stopped when the opening/closing execution mode ends. However, since the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode of step S517 is executed immediately after step S516, when the high frequency support mode is set after the open/close execution mode, it is immediately directed to the external terminal 81d for the support mode. Signal output is started.

Further, the state in which “1” is set in the fourth unit area 124 is, in addition to the above case, a case where the high frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times and then the low frequency support mode is shifted to. Is also canceled.

By the way, the external output setting process for the number of games is executed in step S310 of the game number control process (FIG. 13). In the external output setting process for the number of games, a process of setting the information of the fifth unit area 125 in the external output buffer 94d to "1" is executed. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output to the external terminal 81e for the number of games is started, and the output of the information attached to the terminal 81e is performed by the hall computer. It is possible to do this for the HC. In this case, the timing at which the external output setting process for the number of games is executed is the timing at which the game number ends. Further, the state in which “1” is set in the fifth unit area 125 is canceled by the external output canceling process in step S413.

<Regarding external output processing executed by the hall computer HC>
Next, a process executed by the hall computer HC according to an external output from the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

As described above, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL1. In detail regarding such electrical connection, as shown in FIG. 28, the electrical wiring group EL1 individually has six electrical wirings. On the other hand, the external terminal board 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with eight external terminals 81a to 81h as shown in FIG. That is, the number of signal paths between one pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer HC is smaller than the number of external terminals 81a to 81h provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In this case, the external terminal 81a for jackpot, the external terminal 81b for open/close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot have some external output contents for performing external output during the open/close execution mode. Although overlapped, the other external terminals 81d to 81h have no correlation with the content of the external output and are independent. Therefore, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is introduced without modifying the conventional equipment, one of the external terminal 81a for the big hit, the external terminal 81b for the open/close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for the conditional big hit is provided. Is considered to be selected for electrical connection. Further, even in a game hall that can provide the same number of signal paths as the number of external terminals 81a to 81h by modifying the conventional equipment, the number of executions of the predetermined opening/closing execution mode is displayed in the data counter DC. It is necessary to select the terminal for reflecting the information on the second display portion DC2 from the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. However, whichever terminal is selected, the hall computer HC executes the same management process.

The management processing executed by the hall computer HC will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is regularly activated at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec.

First, in step S1501, the managed counter provided in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC is updated. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is changed from the previous time. In subsequent step S1502, it is determined whether or not the reception of the opening/closing execution mode system signal from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is started. In this case, in the electric wiring group EL1 of the hall computer HC, the electric wiring to be connected to any of the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is predetermined. Therefore, in step S1502, it is determined whether or not the reception of a signal through the electric wiring is started.

If the “reception of signal” is to always rise from LOW to HI, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the rise of this signal has occurred, and the “reception of signal” is always from HI to LOW. If it is a fall, it may be determined whether or not a fall of this signal has occurred.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1502, in step S1503 the RAM 203 stores information on the date and time at which reception of the opening/closing execution mode system signal has started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. In subsequent step S1504, control start processing of the second display unit is executed. Specifically, the display control of the second display unit DC2 is performed so that the number of times information of the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is incremented by 1, and after the addition. By blinking and displaying the number-of-times information, the player and the manager of the game hall are informed that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. The mode of the notification is arbitrary. For example, when the data counter DC is provided with a light emitting unit other than the first display unit DC1 and the second display unit DC2, the light emitting unit is set to the light emitting state or the blinking state. It may be configured as.

When a negative determination is made in step S1502 or after the processing of step S1504 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has finished receiving the opening/closing execution mode system signal. If the “signal reception” is to always rise from LOW to HI, it is determined whether or not the reception of the switching execution mode system signal has been completed depending on whether or not the fall from HI to LOW has occurred. If the “signal reception” is to constantly fall from HI to LOW, whether or not the reception of the switching execution mode system signal is ended depending on whether or not the rise from LOW to HI has occurred. Should be determined.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1505, in step S1506 the RAM 203 stores information on the date and time at which reception of the opening/closing execution mode system signal for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is completed. In the following step S1507, the control end processing of the second display unit is executed. Specifically, the display control of the second display unit DC2 is performed so that the number-of-times information continues to be displayed in a state where the blinking display of the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is finished. To do.

When a negative determination is made in step S1505 or after the processing of step S1507 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has started receiving the support mode signal. In this case, it is determined whether or not the signal reception is started through the electric wiring connected to the external terminal 81d for the support mode in the electric wiring group EL1 of the hall computer HC.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1508, then in step S1509 the RAM 203 stores information on the date and time at which reception of the support mode signal has started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. In the following step S1510, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has just received the open/close execution mode system signal. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1510, then in step S1511 a support mode related notification start process is executed.

In the support mode type notification start processing, the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time starts notification indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode. Although the mode of the notification is arbitrary, for example, the number of times information displayed on the first display unit DC1 may be displayed in a blinking manner, or the dedicated light emitting unit may be displayed in a lighting or blinking manner. Further, as described above, the notification indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is executed on condition that the support mode related signal is received during the reception of the switching execution mode related signal. That is, the notification indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is received by receiving the support mode system signal while the hall computer HC recognizes that it is in the open/close execution mode or after the open/close execution mode. Be started.

When a negative determination is made in step S1508, a negative determination is made in step S1510, or after the processing of step S1511 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1512, and another external output is performed for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. The process corresponding to is executed. For example, when the reception of the support mode system signal is completed, the RAM 203 stores the information on the date and time when the support mode system signal reception of the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is completed and the high frequency support mode is in progress. The notification indicating that is ended.

Further, for example, when the reception of the signal from the external terminal 81e for the number of games is started, the number information of the first display portion DC1 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed is incremented by one. Display control of the first display unit DC1 is performed. Further, when the reception of the signal from the external terminal 81g corresponding to the information output indicating that the predetermined number of game balls has been paid out, the predetermined number of the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is stored in the RAM 203. The information indicating that the game balls have been paid out is stored with the date and time information attached. After executing the processing of step S1512, the present management processing ends.

<External output execution timing>
Next, the execution timing of the external output will be described in association with the difference in the open/close execution mode patterns.

First, a case in which the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern D is executed based on the low-probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 33(A).

33(a) shows the output status of commands from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72, FIG. 33(b) shows the opening/closing status of the special winning opening 32a, and FIG. 33(c). The output state from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81a for jackpot is shown, FIG.33(d) shows the output state from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81b for opening/closing execution modes, and FIG.33(e) is. 33(f) shows an output status from the main control device 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot, and FIG. 33(f) is a notification indicating that the second display unit DC2 is in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as execution notification). ) Shows the execution status. In addition, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c among the external terminals 81a to 81c, and in the second display portion DC2, the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is externally connected. The case where the output status is reflected will be described.

In the situation where the effect of the game time is being executed, the variation end command is transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing of t1, and the game time effect is ended. After that, the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t2, and the production for the opening/closing execution mode is started in response to the opening command transmitted from the main control device 71. Further, signal output from the main controller 71 is started to all of the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. Then, the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, so that the in-execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2.

After that, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, opening of the special winning opening 32a in the 1R round game is started and a round start command is transmitted. Further, at the timing of t4, the condition for ending the first round game is satisfied, so that the special winning opening 32a is closed and the round end command is transmitted. In this case, the opening of the special winning opening 32a is performed in a long time mode that enables winning of the upper limit number of round games.

After that, opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is repeated for a long time, and at the timing of t5 which is the timing when the round game of the 15th round ends, counting of the waiting time for ending is started and the main controller 71 The ending production is started by sending an ending command from. Then, at the timing of t6, the waiting time for ending elapses, the command for variation and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 71, and a new game time is started. Further, the signal output from main controller 71 to each of external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is ended, the in-execution notification on the second display portion DC2 is ended.

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern D in which the special winning opening 32a is opened for a long time from the 1R round game, the external from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode. By starting output and continuing until the end timing of the open/close execution mode, the external output is continued during the period in which the special winning opening 32a is opened for a long time. As a result, during the period in which a large amount of game balls are paid out through the execution of the open/close execution mode, the external output is continued, and it is indicated that the large amount of game balls is paid out through the execution of the open/close execution mode. It becomes possible to recognize in HC. In other words, by checking the management data created in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC, it is possible to know whether the payout of a large amount of game balls is due to fraud or due to the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, the manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the in-execution notification is being performed on the second display portion DC2, so that the payout of a large amount of game balls is due to fraud or depending on the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to easily grasp whether it is a thing.

Further, in the gaming hall, the nail adjustment of the gaming area may be performed by grasping the number of prize balls per unit time for each pachinko machine 10. In this case, by making it possible to identify in the management data of the hall computer HC whether or not the open/close execution mode in which a large amount of game balls are paid out is generated, the situation in which the game balls are easily paid out and the game balls are paid out It is possible to know the number of prize balls per unit time for each of the situations where it is unlikely to occur, and it is possible to perform the above-mentioned nail adjustment satisfactorily.

Furthermore, when the support mode of the electric accessory 34a shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the opening/closing execution mode, the electric accessory 34a is likely to be in the open state, and the prize is given to the lower working port 34. Is likely to occur. In this case, the external output is performed to the hall computer HC as described above, and further, the notification during execution is performed on the second display unit DC2, so that the winning in the lower working opening 34 is frequently generated. It is possible to know whether the item is legitimate or fraudulent.

Next, in the case where the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the low-probability jackpot result A or the implicit high-probability jackpot result A in the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, FIG. This will be described with reference to the timing chart of B). Note that the contents of FIGS. 33A to 33F are as described above, and the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot, and the second display portion DC2 is concerned. 33A is similar to the case of FIG. 33A in that the condition of the external output through the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is reflected.

In the situation where the effect of the game time is being executed, the variation end command is transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing of t1, and the game time effect is ended. After that, the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t2, and the production for the opening/closing execution mode is started in response to the opening command transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, the signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b, but the signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not performed. .. Then, since the signal is not output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC, the in-execution notification on the second display unit DC2 is not performed.

After that, the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, so that the special winning opening 32a in the 1R round game is opened and closed in a short time mode. In this case, the round start command and the round end command are transmitted at relatively short intervals.

After that, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is repeated in a short time period, and the waiting time for ending is started at the timing of t4 which is the timing when the round game of the 15th round ends. Then, at the timing of t5, the waiting time for ending elapses, the command for variation and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 71, and a new game time is started. In this case, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the switching execution mode external terminal 81b is terminated.

Here, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the result of the special deviation, the round start command and the round end command are not transmitted from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. , And the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81b for the open/close execution mode is performed, but the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot is not performed, but other open/close operations The mode in the execution mode is common to the case of FIG. Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, the effect A1 including the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is executed. As described above, in the low frequency support mode, in the case of any of the low-probability jackpot result A, the imprecise high-probability jackpot result A, and the special deviation result, the low-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening/closing execution mode. In the configuration, the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is performed in this situation by predicting which game result has triggered or which of the winning/winning lottery modes is set after the opening/closing execution mode, and paying attention to the game. The purpose is to raise it. In such a situation, by not outputting the signal of the main control device 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot, the effect of setting the above-described predictive game disappears depending on the external output situation. You can prevent it from happening.

Further, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, the opening of the special winning opening 32a is performed in a short time mode that does not substantially cause the winning, and a large amount of game balls are paid out during the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A. If so, it is clearly due to fraud. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, there is no problem regarding unauthorized monitoring even if the hall computer HC does not know that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in which external output is not performed during the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, there is no problem regarding unauthorized monitoring. Further, there is no problem in the management of the pachinko machine 10 for the purpose of adjusting the nails.

Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is changed in the situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the low-frequency support mode, the low-frequency support mode is maintained after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. There is no problem in monitoring whether the frequent occurrence of winning in the lower working opening 34 is legitimate or fraudulent.

Next, a case in which the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the result of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 34.

34(a) shows the output status of the command from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72, FIG. 34(b) shows the opening/closing status of the special winning opening 32a, and FIG. The execution state of the common effect commonly executed in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A to pattern C is shown, and FIG. 34(d) is a finalized effect showing that the explicit high certainty jackpot result A is used as an execution opportunity. 34(e) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a, and FIG. 34(f) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b. 34(g) shows the output situation from the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and FIG. 34(h) shows the execution situation of the in-execution notification on the second display unit DC2. Indicates. In addition, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c among the external terminals 81a to 81c, and in the second display portion DC2, the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is externally connected. The case where the output status is reflected will be described.

In the situation where the effect of the game time is being executed, the variation end command is transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing of t1, and the game time effect is ended. After that, the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t2, and the common effect is started when the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, the signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b, but the signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not performed. .. Then, since the signal is not output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC, the in-execution notification on the second display unit DC2 is not performed. However, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A this time, unlike the case of FIG. 33B, the delay time for performing the output delay to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is set.

After that, the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, so that the special winning opening 32a in the 1R round game is opened and closed in a short time mode. In this case, the round start command and the round end command are transmitted at relatively short intervals.

After that, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is repeated in a short time period, and the waiting time for ending is started at the timing of t4 which is the timing when the round game of the 15th round ends. In this case, the effect in the opening/closing execution mode is switched from the common effect to the fixed effect. As a result, as described above, the player can understand that the opening/closing execution mode this time is triggered by the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A.

Further, when the delay time elapses at the timing, the signal output from the main control device 71 is started to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot. Then, the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, so that the in-execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2.

After that, at the timing of t5, the finalizing effect is ended by the lapse of the waiting time for ending, and the command for variation and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 71 to start a new game time. Further, the signal output from main controller 71 to each of external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is ended, the in-execution notification on the second display portion DC2 is ended.

As described above, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is performed. .. When the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the low-frequency support mode, when the explicit high-precision jackpot result A results and the pattern A is switched to the opening/closing execution mode, the low-precision jackpot result A, the implicit high-precision jackpot result A, or the special deviation Unlike the case where the result is used as an opportunity, the high-frequency support mode is set after the opening/closing execution mode. In such a situation, the signal output of the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is performed, so that even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, the lower operation port is operated. It is possible to monitor whether or not the situation in which a prize is frequently won is genuine or fraudulent.

Further, the signal output of main controller 71 to external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is started at a timing in the middle of the open/close execution mode. As a result, if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot in the game hall, even if the data counter DC is checked until the middle of the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, any game result Since it is not possible for the player to know whether or not has triggered, the effect of causing the player to predict which game result triggered when the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A is executed is It is possible to manage the pachinko machine 10 without losing it.

In particular, the signal output of the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not started in the situation where the common effect is being executed. Therefore, by visually recognizing the opening/closing mode and the common effect of the special winning opening 32a, it is possible to manage the pachinko machine 10 without losing the effect of causing the player to predict which game result has triggered the game. Will be possible.

Even when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed when the low-probability jackpot result A or the implicit high-probability jackpot result A is executed in the high-frequency support mode, after the delay time elapses. The signal output from the main controller 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is performed. As a result, it is possible to manage well when the high-frequency support mode is maintained when the big hit is won.

Next, a case in which the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed based on the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 35.

Note that FIG. 35(a) shows the output status of commands from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72, FIG. 35(b) shows the opening/closing status of the special winning opening 32a, and FIG. FIG. 35D shows the execution status of the common effect commonly executed in the opening/closing execution modes of pattern A to pattern C, and FIG. 35D shows the execution status of the fixed effect indicating the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B, 35(e) shows an output situation from the main control device 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a, and FIG. 35(f) shows an output situation from the main control device 71 to the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b. FIG. 35(g) shows an output situation from the main control device 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot, and FIG. 35(h) shows an execution situation of the in-execution notification on the second display unit DC2. In addition, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c among the external terminals 81a to 81c, and in the second display portion DC2, the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is externally connected. The case where the output status is reflected will be described.

In the situation where the effect of the game time is being executed, the variation end command is transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing of t1, and the game time effect is ended. After that, the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t2, and the common effect is started in response to the opening command transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b, but the signal output to the condition jackpot external terminal 81a is not performed. Since the signal is not output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC, the in-execution notification on the second display unit DC2 is not performed. However, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B this time, unlike the case of FIG. 33B, the delay time for performing the output delay to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is set.

Then, the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, and the first round game is started. Here, as described above, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B triggered by the explicit high certainty jackpot result B, the special winning opening 32a is opened 15 times in the short time mode in the 1R round game, so t3 After the timing of, the special winning opening 32a is repeatedly opened in a short time mode.

After that, at the timing of t4, the common section in which the opening/closing mode of the special winning opening 32a is common in the opening/closing execution modes of the patterns A to C ends, so that the effect in the opening/closing execution mode changes from the common effect. Switch to finalized production. As a result, as described above, the player can recognize that this time is the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B.

Further, when the delay time elapses at the timing, the signal output from the main control device 71 is started to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot. Then, the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, so that the in-execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2. By the way, at the timing of t4, the round game of the first round is finished, so that the round end command is transmitted.

After that, at the timing of t5, the special winning opening 32a is opened once in a short time mode as the second round game. In this case, the round start command and the round end command are transmitted at relatively short intervals.

After that, at the timing of t6, the opening of the special winning opening 32a in the third round game is started, and the round start command is transmitted. In addition, at the timing of t7, the condition for ending the third round game is satisfied, so that the special winning opening 32a is closed and the round end command is transmitted. In this case, the opening of the special winning opening 32a is performed in a long time mode that enables winning of the upper limit number of round games.

After that, the special winning opening 32a is repeatedly opened and closed in a long time mode, and at the timing of t8 which is the timing when the round game of the 15th round is finished, the waiting time for ending is started and the main controller 71 The ending production is started by sending an ending command from. Then, at the timing of t9, the waiting time for ending elapses, the command for variation and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 71, and a new game time is started. Further, the signal output from main controller 71 to each of external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is ended, the in-execution notification on the second display portion DC2 is ended.

In the case where the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed as described above, the conditional jackpot is started by the time the opening of the special winning opening 32a is started in a long time mode in which a large amount of game balls are paid out. The signal output from the main control device 71 is performed to the external terminal 81c for use. As a result, during the period in which a large amount of game balls are paid out through execution of the open/close execution mode, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot, the large amount of game balls is paid out. It is possible for the hall computer HC to recognize that it is through the execution of the open/close execution mode. Further, as in the case of FIG. 34, it is possible to monitor whether the situation in which a prize is frequently generated in the lower working opening 34 is regular or fraudulent.

Further, the signal output of main controller 71 to external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is started at a timing in the middle of the open/close execution mode. As a result, if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot in the game hall, even if the data counter DC is checked until the middle of the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, any pattern A ~ It is not possible for the player to know which one of the patterns C is. Therefore, the effect of causing the player to predict which pattern of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the common section in which the opening/closing mode of the special winning opening 32a is common to the patterns A to C is eliminated. Without this, it becomes possible to manage the pachinko machine 10.

In particular, the signal output of the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not started in the situation where the common effect is being executed. Therefore, by visually recognizing the opening/closing mode and the common effect of the special winning opening 32a, it is possible to manage the pachinko machine 10 without losing the effect of causing the player to predict which pattern of the opening/closing execution modes is being executed. Will be possible.

In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed based on the result of the low-probability jackpot result B or the imprecise high-probability jackpot result B, the special winning opening 32a of the short-time mode in the 1R and 2R Although the distribution of the number of releases is different, the other points are the same as in the case of FIG. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, although the opening pattern of the first winning opening 32a of the first and second Rs and the number of consecutive opening of the special winning opening 32a in the short time mode are different, the main terminals for the external terminals 81a to 81c are different. The signal output pattern and the output start timing from the control device 71 are the same as in the case of FIG.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

As a game result which is a result based on both win/loss lot and distribution lottery in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode, the setting mode of the win/loss lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing execution mode By diversifying multiple types of elements such as the support mode setting mode and setting multiple types of game results, it is possible to diversify the game. In this case, the frequency of selecting a predetermined control mode as the open/close control mode of the special winning opening 32a from the start timing in the open/close execution mode to at least the midway timing differs depending on the subsequent contents. As a result, the player can predict the content determined as the destination of the subsequent progression by checking the state of the variable winning device 32 after the start execution mode is started. Therefore, when shifting to the open/close execution mode, the player does not simply digest the open/close execution mode, but predicts whether the contents in the open/close execution mode or after the open/close execution mode will be desirable for the player. While opening and closing execution mode is expected to be consumed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the open/close execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution modes of patterns A to C, the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a from the start timing to at least the timing in the middle and the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a at each time are common. Accordingly, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, it is considered that the player plays the game while expecting that the subsequent contents will be desirable at least in the common section. Therefore, it is possible to favorably maintain the player's expectation when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

In addition, in a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes having a common section, the number of times of opening/closing the special winning opening 32a is different in a continuous short time period including the common section. In this way, when the information for making the prediction is provided by the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a in the same manner, the element to be noticed by the player in making the prediction becomes clear. Further, according to the configuration, the player is expected to pay attention to the variable winning device 32 from the start of the opening/closing execution mode so as not to miss the number of times.

In a common section in which the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a and the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a in each time are common in a plurality of types of opening and closing execution modes, opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is repeatedly executed in a short time mode. As a result, it is possible to change the state of the variable winning device 32 in the common section, as compared to the configuration in which the single winning opening 32a is continuously opened in the common section while providing the commonality in the common section. Becomes Further, it is possible to provide the common section while suppressing the number of balls entering the special winning opening 32a from being extremely increased during the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the possibility that the upper limit number of game balls will be won and the round game will be ended while the special winning opening 32a is opened due to the short time mode is reduced. This makes it easier for the player to check how the opening and closing are repeated a plurality of times.

In the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disengagement result, it is not the round number regulation mode in which a plurality of round games are set, but when the winning of the upper limit number of game balls to the special winning opening 32a occurs. The opening/closing number regulation mode in which the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the number of times of opening/closing of the special winning opening 32a completed by then. Further, the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number related to the opening of the special winning opening 32a, and the number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number which is the ending condition of the round game 1. .. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special deviation result, it is possible to keep the number of times of opening/closing the special winning opening 32a less than the upper limit by continuing to launch the game ball in the common section. Then, by the player confirming this, it is possible to clearly understand that the game result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode is the special outlier result. In addition, the player confirms that the number of times of opening and closing reaches the upper limit even though the upper limit number of game balls has been won before the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a reaches the upper limit in the common section. By doing so, it is possible to clearly understand that the game result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode is not the special miss result.

That is, it is possible to provide a game in which the game result that has triggered the transition of the opening/closing execution mode due to the setting of the common section is provided, and the transition is made according to the entry mode of the game ball in the common section. It is possible to provide a game in which it is possible to grasp the game result that has triggered, and it is possible to provide those games to the player in a well-balanced manner. Furthermore, a well-balanced game that raises the degree of attention can be provided only by the difference in the conditions of the common section.

Further, in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by the jackpot result, the common section is configured by a plurality of round games. Thereby, in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning device 32 is opened over the number of round games even if a large number of game balls are won in the common section. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disengagement result, the variable winning device 32 is always opened once, but is the variable winning device 32 executed more than that number of times? Whether or not depends on the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device 32. As a result, regarding the relationship between the winning mode of the variable winning device 32 and the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened, the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result and the opening/closing execution of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result. The mode can be made different, and the player can easily understand the type of the game result through the winning mode of the variable winning device 32.

In particular, in both the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special miss result and the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result, the maximum number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in the common section is the same. In the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by the jackpot result, the variable winning device 32 is opened once in one round game. As a result, in the common section of the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result, the variable winning a prize device 32 opens and closes the upper limit number of times without depending on the winning mode of the variable winning a prize device 32. As a result, when grasping the game result that has triggered the transition according to the winning mode to the variable winning device 32, the player can determine the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 and the number of times of opening to the variable winning device 32. Since it suffices to simply check, the elements to be noticed in grasping the game result are clarified, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In the first round of the number-of-rounds specifying mode and in a situation where the special winning opening 32a is opened for a short time, when a prize is won in the special winning opening 32a, a premium effect is executed, from the start timing. The number of times of opening and closing in the continuous short time mode is the same, but the number of times of opening and closing in the short time mode allocated to the 1R round game is clearly higher in the high-precision jackpot result B. It is larger than in the case of B and the implicit high-precision jackpot result B. As a result, the probability that the premium effect is executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is higher than in the case where either the low-accuracy jackpot result B or the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is triggered. Can be increased. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B occurs, it is unclear which jackpot result is a trigger from the aspect of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode excluding the premium effect and the aspect of the special winning opening 32a. When the premiere effect is performed, it is possible to predict that the possibility of the explicit high certainty jackpot result B is relatively high.

Furthermore, in the short time mode from the start timing to the 8th time, the winning in the special winning opening 32a has not occurred, and in the short time mode after the 9th time, the winning in the special winning opening 32a has occurred. The player who confirms that the effect has been performed can clearly recognize that the opening/closing execution mode that is currently being executed is triggered by the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B.

In order to enable management of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC of the game hall, the external terminal board 81 has an external output when the gaming state is changed, and the external terminal board 81 has an external terminal for conditional jackpot. 81c is provided so that external output is not performed from the external terminal 81c in the common section. As a result, even if the data counter DC is checked in the common section, the player cannot grasp the type of the open/close execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the shift. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of setting the common section.

Further, in the common section, the common effect is executed as a low identification effect so that the player cannot grasp the type of the opening/closing execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the transition. Thereby, it is possible to further enhance the effect of setting the common section, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the external output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not performed in the situation where the common effect is being executed. As a result, even if the data counter DC is checked in the situation where the common effect is being executed, the player cannot grasp the type of the opening/closing execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the shift. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of the common presentation being performed.

Here, in the case of a special disengagement result, the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A in which the payout of the game balls cannot be substantially expected is executed, and after the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, before the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Return to the playing state. That is, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special disconnection result is executed for performance, and does not substantially contribute to the profit of the player. Then, to reflect the number of times of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special disengagement result in the number-of-times information of the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC is to select the pachinko machine 10 in which the game is to be played by the second display unit. It is not preferable for the player who wants to confirm the contents of DC2. On the other hand, when the switching of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special disengagement result is not output externally, and when the switching of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is output externally, the switching execution mode of pattern A is executed. By checking the data counter DC when it is played, it is possible to clearly understand whether or not the game result that triggered the shift to the open/close execution mode is a special out-of-game result. In this case, the effect of setting the special miss result as the game result disappears. Under such circumstances, by providing the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot as described above and not performing the external output related to the execution of the opening/closing execution mode in the common section, the opening/closing execution triggered by the jackpot result is performed. The effect of setting the special deviation result can be suitably obtained while allowing the execution of the mode to be managed.

In the case of the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, external output from the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is started before the opening of the special winning opening 32a in a long time period after the common section has elapsed. It As a result, it is possible to satisfactorily manage the period during which a large amount of game balls are paid out in the opening/closing execution mode while preventing the effect of setting the common section from disappearing.

When the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, from the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot until the common section elapses and the gaming state of the high-frequency support mode is started. The external output of is started. As a result, the effect of setting the common section is not lost, and the winning frequency of the lower working port 34 is managed and the action of illegally opening the electric accessory 34a is satisfactorily monitored. be able to.

Since the external terminal 81d for the support mode is provided separately from the external terminals 81a to 81c of the open/close execution mode system, in the hall computer HC, transition to the open/close execution mode and transition to the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish between and. This makes it possible to manage whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and also to manage whether or not the shift to the high-frequency support mode has been performed without the termination of the open/close execution mode as a trigger. It becomes possible to do it. In such a configuration, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the type of open/close execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the transition, external output is performed in any open/close execution mode. If not set, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not the high frequency support mode is triggered by the end of the open/close execution mode when the high frequency support mode is set. On the other hand, as described above, when the high-frequency support mode is set, the external output is performed in advance in the open/close execution mode, so that the above management can be favorably performed.

When the game result in the low-frequency support mode becomes the low-probability jackpot result A or the implicit high-probability jackpot result A and the pattern A shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, external output triggered by the shift of the game state is not performed. .. As a result, when the game result in the low frequency support mode is the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result, the low-probability jackpot result A or the implicit high-probability jackpot result A, after the opening/closing execution mode Even in the case, it is impossible to grasp the game result that triggered the shift from the data counter DC. Therefore, by setting the transition mode of the game state as described above, it is possible not only to eliminate the effect that it becomes possible to pay attention not only to the game in the opening/closing execution mode but also to the game after the opening/closing execution mode, The pachinko machine 10 in the game hall can be managed.

Further, when the payout of the game balls does not substantially occur during the open/close execution mode and the low frequency support mode is set after the open/close execution mode, external output need not be performed during the open/close execution mode. Therefore, even if the external output is not performed as described above, there is no problem in managing the pachinko machine 10.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the first embodiment described above, but may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to the configuration of the first embodiment alone, or may be applied to the configuration of the first embodiment in a predetermined combination.

(1) In the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result, a plurality of round games are executed in the common section and the variable winning device 32 is opened/closed only once in each round game. Instead, the number of round games in the common section and the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened/closed may not match. For example, in the common section, by opening and closing the variable winning device 32 multiple times within the range of at least one round game, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed is greater than the number of round games. The configuration may be set.

Even in this case, the open/close execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result includes a plurality of round games, so that the open/close execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result is variable. While the minimum number of opening and closing of the prize winning device 32 is defined by a plurality of times, the minimum number of opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 is defined by one in the opening and closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result. Both are different in points. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the type of the opening/closing execution mode and the game result that triggered the transition are grasped according to the winning mode of the variable winning device 32 in the common section.

(2) In the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result, the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32, which is a sufficient condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode, is limited to two. It may not be performed, and may be one. In this case, the common section is likely to be shortened in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result.

In addition, although the phenomenon is less likely to occur than in the first embodiment, the upper limit number is set in a range less than the upper limit number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 which is the other sufficient condition for ending the opening and closing execution mode. You may set to three or more. In this case, the upper limit number may be set to the same number as the upper limit number set as a sufficient condition when the round game is finished, or may be set to a number more than that. ..

(3) In the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result, the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32, which is one sufficient condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode, ends the opening/closing execution mode. Instead of the configuration that is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32, which is the other sufficient condition, the upper limit number may be set to the same number as the upper limit number. Even in this case, by setting the opening duration in the short time period to be longer than that in the first embodiment, the common section is shortened in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result. It is possible to generate an event.

Further, the upper limit number may be set to a number larger than the upper limit number. Even in this case, the execution of the short-time mode has a large influence on the game ball granting rate, but by setting the open duration time in the short-time mode to a time longer than that in the first embodiment, It is possible to cause an event in which the common section is shortened in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by the special deviation result. Even with this configuration, the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result and the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result are the minimum number of opening/closing times of the variable winning device 32. By differentiating, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is a special miss result.

(4) The opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disengagement result is not the opening/closing number defining mode but the round number defining mode in which only 1R is set, and the prize is awarded to the variable winning device 32 in the one round game. The upper limit number and the upper limit number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 may be set as in the first embodiment. Even in this case, the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A in which only one round game is set is different from the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A in which a plurality of round games is set. It may happen that the number of times of opening and closing is reduced.

By the way, in the configuration, if the player is clearly informed of the upper limit number of round games to be executed during the opening/closing execution mode, the above-mentioned effect will be reduced. It is preferable that the player does not easily understand the upper limit number by not providing a display unit or by displaying a pattern that is not related to the number instead of displaying a specific number even if the upper limit number is notified.

(5) In a configuration in which a plurality of types of jackpot results that trigger the shift of the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B are set, when some jackpot results are used as an opportunity, the special winning opening 32a is opened/closed in a short time mode. The repeated section is configured by only one round game, and when other jackpot results are used as an opportunity, the section may include a plurality of round games. In this case, for at least the former section, the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning apparatus 32, which is a sufficient condition for ending the round game, is set to be equal to or less than the maximum number of times of opening and closing the variable winning apparatus 32 executed in the section. As a result, it becomes easy to understand which jackpot result is used as a trigger from the relationship between the winning mode of the game ball and the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in the section.

By the way, in the configuration, in order not to be able to grasp which jackpot result is triggered from the appearance of the variable winning device 32 in the entire opening/closing execution mode in a situation where the above-mentioned section is not shortened The upper limit number of round games in the both open/close execution modes may be different.

(6) A plurality of round number defining modes having a section in which the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened in a short time mode is common are set, and included in the common section between the round number defining modes. The number of round games played may be different. Even in this case, the minimum number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened by the short-time mode is different during the common section, and the winning mode for the variable winning device 32 in the common section is different. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the type of the opening/closing execution mode and the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. Further, in each of these round games, the upper limit number for the variable winning device 32 which is a sufficient condition when the round game is finished is equal to or less than the upper limit number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 during the round game. May be

(7) In the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disengagement result, even if the winning of the upper limit number of game balls to the variable winning device 32 occurs before the number of opening/closing of the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit number. The teaching effect may not be executed. In this case, the common effect may be simply ended and the ending effect may be performed.

In addition, in the last opening of the variable winning device 32, the teaching effect is not executed when the winning number of game balls to the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit number. May be configured. Further, the teaching effect may be configured to be executed with a predetermined probability when the execution condition is satisfied.

(8) A plurality of types of upper limit number of game balls may be set for the variable winning device 32, which is a sufficient condition for ending the round game. In this case, the upper limit number of game balls for the variable winning device 32, which is a sufficient condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disengagement result, is smaller than the minimum upper limit number related to the round game. The configuration may be set to, or the number may be set to a number smaller than the maximum number.

(9) In the opening/closing execution mode of patterns A to C, instead of the configuration of setting the common section in which the number of times of continuously opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in the short time period is the same, any pattern is used. However, it may be configured to set an irregular section in which the opening/closing mode of the variable winning device 32 is randomly determined. Even in this case, it is difficult for the player to know which pattern the opening/closing execution mode is in the irregular section. Therefore, in the irregular section, the subsequent contents may be desirable for the player. It is thought that they will play games while expecting. However, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned common section in order to increase the clarity of the points to be noted when playing a game while expecting that the subsequent contents will be desirable for the player. Further, as the common section, at least one of the time during opening and the time between consecutive openings is slightly different, but a section having a form that is visually difficult to identify may be set as a whole.

Even if the irregular section is set instead of the common section as described above, the irregular section is set in accordance with the winning mode for the variable winning device 32 in the irregular section as in the first embodiment. By setting the rule section to be shortened and not shortened, or by setting the irregular section to be easily shortened or hard to be shortened, the degree of attention to the game is increased. It is possible to improve.

(10) In a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, an irregular period→a common section→a non-common section or an individual section corresponding to each opening/closing execution mode may be set, and a common section→an irregular section→a non-common section. The section or the individual section corresponding to each opening/closing execution mode may be set, or the common section→non-common section or the individual section corresponding to each opening/closing execution mode→the common section may be set.

Even with the above-described configuration, there are cases where the irregular section and the common section are shortened and where they are not shortened, depending on the winning mode for the variable winning device 32 in the irregular section or the common section. By adopting a configuration in which there is a case where the irregular section or the common section is easily shortened and a case where the common section is not easily shortened, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

(11) The number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a and the setting pattern of the opening mode in the opening/closing execution mode of each pattern are not limited to those in the above-described embodiment, and the operation and effect described individually in the above-described embodiment It is arbitrary as long as it can play at least one of them.

Further, the upper limit number of each round game is not limited to that in the above-described embodiment, and is arbitrary as long as at least one of the operational effects individually described in the above-described embodiment can be exhibited. .. Furthermore, the upper limit number may be different depending on the type of the round number defining mode, or the upper limit number may be different between round games of the same round number defining mode.

Further, the opening mode by the short time mode is not limited to the mode in which the winning is not substantially generated in the variable winning device 32, and the time is equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and the firing cycle of the game ball x The time may be set to n (n=1, 2, or 3) or less. In addition, although the winning to the variable winning device 32 may be substantially generated by making the opening duration longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, the opening duration is the firing cycle of the gaming ball and the upper limit number during the round game. It may be a mode shorter than the product of and, and may be the same mode. Even in this case, in a situation where the special winning opening 32a is opened in a short time mode, the possibility that the maximum number of winnings of the round game will be awarded to the big winning opening 32a is reduced.

(12) In the round game in which only the special winning opening 32a is opened in a short time mode, the upper limit is set instead of the structure in which the winning of the upper limit number of game balls set for the round game does not substantially occur. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which winning of a certain number of game balls can occur. For example, the opening continuation time related to the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a executed in the round game is set to a time longer than the firing cycle of the game ball (for example, in the range of 0.6 sec to 64 sec), and the opening continuation is continued. The product of time and the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a according to the opening mode is the same as or substantially the same as the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of round games, or 1 for the product. The value is set to be twice or more and less than 2 times or 1 times or more and less than 3 times. In this case, depending on the flow-down mode of the game balls in the game area, the upper limit number of game balls may or may not be won in the round game.

Further, like the relationship between the open/close execution mode in the case of the low-probability jackpot result B and the implicit high-probability jackpot result B and the open/close execution mode in the case of the explicit high-probability jackpot result B, a plurality of consecutive round games In the configuration in which the total number of times of opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a in the short time mode executed in those multiple round games is the same, but the distribution of the number of times of opening and closing in each round game is different, as described above, Depending on how the game balls flow down, a configuration may be applied in which the upper limit number of game balls may or may not be won in the round game.

Specifically, in the other opening/closing execution mode, the number of times of opening/closing in the short-time mode of the 1R is set to be larger than that in the other opening/closing execution mode, but the number of opening/closing in the short-time mode of the 2R is set to be small. In addition, there is a high probability that the upper limit number of game balls will be won in the first opening in the other opening/closing execution mode, and the upper limit number of game balls will be won in at least one of the first opening and the second opening in the one opening/closing execution mode. It is possible that the probability of occurrence of is low or substantially impossible, and that the winning of the upper limit number of game balls is substantially impossible in the second opening and closing execution mode of the other opening/closing execution mode. In this case, when a winning of the upper limit number of game balls occurs in the middle of the 1R of the other opening/closing execution mode, the total number of times of opening/closing in the short-time mode in the 1R and 2R of the opening/closing execution mode is Since it is less than the total number of times of opening and closing in the 1R and 2R of the one opening/closing execution mode in the short time mode, the player can recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is the other opening/closing execution mode. Becomes As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode for predicting which the game result is.

Incidentally, the one opening/closing execution mode may correspond to the low-probability jackpot result B, and the other opening/closing execution mode may correspond to the implicit high-probability jackpot result B.

(13) As a short-time mode, a plurality of types of short-time modes may be set so that the variable winning device 32 has the same operation mode although the exact opening duration is different. For example, the appearance mode of operation of the variable winning a prize device 32 is the same in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result A and the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special deviation result, but in each opening/closing of the special winning opening 32a. The selected types of short time modes may be different. Further, such a configuration may be applied to the medium time mode and the long time mode.

(14) In addition to or instead of the configuration of setting a plurality of types of opening of the special winning opening 32a by changing the opening duration time, by changing the opening degree of the big winning opening 32a such as half open or full open A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of opening modes of the mouth 32a are set.

(15) The advantage degree of the game state that shifts after the opening/closing execution mode may be defined by the difference in the number of continuations in the high probability mode. Further, the advantage degree of the game state to be transferred after the opening/closing execution mode may not be regulated by the win/loss lottery mode, but may be regulated by the presence/absence of the high frequency support mode and the difference in the number of continuations.

(16) Instead of a configuration in which a combination of common symbols is always stopped and displayed in the game times when the game is to be switched to the opening/closing execution mode of patterns A to C, any one of the stop results is randomly selected. It may be configured such that it is difficult to grasp whether the open/close execution mode is triggered by the game result. In this case, the randomly selected stop result may not include a mode in which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines.

(17) Instead of the configuration in which the same common effect is always executed in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A and the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B, any one of a plurality of types of effects may be executed. In this case, the plurality of types of effects may be completely randomly executed.

(18) In the situation where the execution condition of the premium effect is the first round of the round number defining mode and the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a is a short time mode, one prize is generated in the special winning opening 32a. Instead of the configuration described above, a plurality of winnings may be set as the execution condition, and the winning condition may be set in the lottery executed in response to the winning of the special winning opening 32a in the situation. .. Further, as the execution condition of the premium effect, a condition that the high probability mode is set after the opening/closing execution mode may be added. In this case, the premium effect is an effect indicating that the high-probability mode is fixed. Further, the execution mode of the premium effect is arbitrary, and for example, the effect is not executed by the symbol display device 41, but the effect may be executed by the display lamp section 58 or the speaker section 59.

In addition, the combination of the low-probability jackpot result B and the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result B and the explicit high-probability jackpot result B do not make the number of times of opening and closing the first round of the round number regulation mode different, but the low-probability jackpot result B And the non-explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, the number of times of opening and closing may be different.

(19) The combination of the pattern of each opening/closing execution mode and the pattern of the setting mode of the game state after the execution of the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to that in the above-described embodiment, and is arbitrary. For example, in the case of the special disengagement result, the opening/closing execution mode which is the same as or similar to that of either the pattern B or the pattern C may be executed.

(20) In the above-described embodiment, when the game result is the low-probability jackpot result A, when the situation resulting in the game result is the low-frequency support mode, after the opening/closing execution mode, the end reference number of game times is Although it was configured not to shift to high frequency support mode that continues until it is exhausted, it is not limited to this, even in low frequency support mode, high frequency that continues until the end reference number of game times is exhausted It may be configured to shift to the support mode. In this case, in relation to the special miss result, if any of the big hit results, a situation more advantageous for the player than the special miss result will occur.

When the low-probability jackpot result A is obtained, instead of opening the special winning opening 32a according to the short time mode in the above embodiment, the product time of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number during the round game is The special winning opening 32a may be opened over the same, substantially the same or similar time. Even in this case, if any one of the jackpots results, a situation more advantageous for the player than the special miss result will occur.

By the way, as the opening and closing execution mode when the implicit high accuracy jackpot result A or another opening and closing execution mode when the implicit high accuracy jackpot result is obtained, the same as when the low accuracy jackpot result A is obtained or A configuration in which the appearance of the operation of the variable winning device 32 is similar may be set. The jackpot result may be easily generated in the high-frequency support mode or in the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode. For example, in the configuration in which the hold information acquired for the occurrence of a prize is distinguished between the upper working opening 33 and the lower working opening 34, and the allocation destination of the jackpot result is different, the holding related to the upper working opening 33 is held. The information may not be configured such that each jackpot result is set as a distribution destination, and the holding information related to the lower operation port 34 may be configured such that each jackpot result is set as a distribution destination. In the configuration, the upper limit number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode that is commonly executed when the low-accuracy jackpot result A and the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result are less than those of other opening/closing execution modes such as the pattern D. (For example, the upper limit number of times is 2).

The upper limit number during the round game is not limited to that in the above embodiment and is arbitrary. For example, when the upper limit number is 10, the opening time of the special winning opening 32a at the time of opening according to the above mode Is 6 seconds.

(21) There may be no common section between the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A and the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B, and the operation of the variable winning device 32 may be entirely different. However, when the low-probability jackpot result A, the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result A, the explicit high-probability jackpot result A, and the special out-of-court result are caused, the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, When the opening/closing execution mode of A is executed, the player will play the game while expecting that the game result that is advantageous to him is used as a trigger.

(22) The maximum number of round games executed in the round number defining mode may be notified. Even if the notification is made, in the configuration of the above embodiment, since the upper limit number of round games in the round number defining mode corresponding to the jackpot result is the same, it is difficult to understand which jackpot result is the opportunity. can do.

Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of round games is informed as described above, the round number defining mode is also executed in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special miss result or the jackpot result that causes the transition of the same gaming state as that. It is difficult to understand which game result is the trigger even if the above notification is made by making the upper limit number of round games the same as other round number regulation mode with the configuration. Can be

(23) Instead of a configuration in which the upper limit number of game balls is awarded to the special winning opening 32a as the ending condition of the round game, for example, an ending trigger opening is provided in the variable winning device 32, and When the elapsed time of the round game reaches a predetermined elapsed time, it is possible to enter the end trigger opening, and when the game ball enters the end opening, the round game ends. May be

Further, as a condition for ending the round game, instead of the configuration in which the winning number and the duration of the variable winning device 32 from the start timing of the round game are set, for example, the round game is started and the special winning opening 32a is set. The number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 and the duration time after the first winning may be set as the ending condition.

Further, instead of the structure in which the special winning opening 32a is closed at the end of the round game, a transition of the round game may occur while the special winning opening 32a remains open.

(24) At least a part of the plurality of types of round number defining modes may have a configuration in which the upper limit number of round games is different. In this case, between the round number defining modes in which the upper limit number of round games is different, the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a and the opening/closing mode of each time may be the same in appearance.

(25) The number of stages in which the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a changes during the round game is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the special winning opening 32a may not be opened a plurality of times during the round game, and the special winning opening 32a may always be opened only once in one round game.

Further, the variable winning device 32 is capable of switching the game ball to a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, but the game ball can be won, but the game can be won. A configuration in which the winning probability of the game ball flowing down the region is extremely low and the winning probability of the game ball is dramatically higher than the state may be switched. In addition, the variable winning device 32 is a state in which a game ball can be won and a probability of a game ball winning is expected with a first probability, and a probability that a game ball winning is expected to occur rather than the state. May be switched to a state in which a high probability of winning a game ball is expected with the second probability.

Further, the switching of each of the above states may be performed not by the operation of the opening/closing door 32b but by the displacement of the variable winning device 32 itself.

(26) The same opening mode is executed for each opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a, but a plurality of types of opening and closing execution modes in which the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a is different may be set. For example, when the first game result and the second game result are different from each other in the setting state of the game state after the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, any of the plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes may be selected. However, the probability of selecting the open/close execution mode in which the number of times of opening/closing is a specific number of times of opening/closing may be different between the case of the first game result and the case of the second game result. In this case, a short time mode may be selected as the mode of opening the special winning opening 32a each time. According to this configuration, while the contents of the privilege given to the player in the opening/closing execution mode are made to be the same, substantially the same, or similar, the player is made to predict the subsequent contents through the control mode of the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible.

(27) The delay time of the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot when the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is not limited to that in the above embodiment.

(27-1) For example, the delay time may be set as a time until a timing in the middle of a common section in which the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. More specifically, the delay time is the time until the midway timing in the last opening round of the special winning opening 32a in the common section or the midway timing in the waiting time between the last opening round and the immediately preceding opening round. May be set.

Further, in the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the delay time elapses, or may be configured to end when the delay time elapses. It may be configured to end by the timing to end, may be configured to end at the timing when the common section ends, or may be configured to end after the common section ends. However, among the common section of the special winning opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, considering that the symbol display device 41 is most likely to be noticed by the player, after the common effect is finished. Alternatively, it is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is started at the end timing thereof.

(27-2) The delay time may be set as the time until the timing after the common section in which the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. However, in order to be able to start the signal output before the gaming state in the high-frequency support mode is started after the opening/closing execution mode of pattern A is ended, the last opening of the special winning opening 32a in the common section is A configuration in which signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is started before the waiting time for ending elapses, more specifically, during the waiting time for ending, after the end. It is preferable that

Further, in the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the common section ends, or may end at the timing when the common section ends, and the delay time elapses after the common section ends. It may be configured to end by the above, may be configured to end when the delay time has elapsed, or may be configured to end after the delay time has elapsed. However, among the common section of the special winning opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is most likely to be noticed by the player, and the large prize is the second most noticeable. Considering that it is the mouth 32a, the common section ends at the same time as the common effect, or the common section ends after the common effect ends, and then the signal from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot. It is preferable that the output is started.

(28) The delay time of the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot when the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is not limited to that in the above embodiment.

(28-1) For example, the delay time may be set as a time until a timing in the middle of a common section in which the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. More specifically, the delay time is the time until the midway timing in the last opening round of the special winning opening 32a in the common section or the midway timing in the waiting time between the last opening round and the immediately preceding opening round. May be set.

Further, in the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the delay time elapses, or may be configured to end when the delay time elapses. It may be configured to end by the timing to end, may be configured to end at the timing when the common section ends, or may be configured to end after the common section ends. However, among the common section of the special winning opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, considering that the symbol display device 41 is most likely to be noticed by the player, after the common effect is finished. Alternatively, it is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is started at the end timing thereof.

(28-2) The delay time may be set as the time until the timing after the common section in which the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. For example, after the opening of the special winning opening 32a for a long time is started, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional big hit may be started. However, in order to properly manage the opening of the special winning opening 32a for a long time, it is preferable that the signal output is started before the opening of the special winning opening 32a for the long time is started. Also, in order to be able to start the signal output before the opening of the special winning opening 32a in the long time mode, in order to start the signal output, the long opening mode after the last opening of the special winning opening 32a in the common section is completed. It is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is started before the opening of the special winning opening 32a is started.

More specifically, after the timing at which the final opening of the special winning opening 32a in the short time mode is completed, and before the timing at which the special winning opening 32a in the long time mode is opened, the conditional jackpot. It is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for use with the device is started. In particular, in the configuration in which the number of times of opening the special winning opening 32a in the short time mode executed from the start timing in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B is the same as that of the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A, after the common section ends. It is preferable that a signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is started during the waiting time until the opening of the special winning opening 32a in the long time mode is started. By the way, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened in the short time mode executed from its start timing is the same as that of the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A. May be applied to the configuration in which is set, or may be applied to the configuration of (27-1), (27-2) or (28-1).

Further, in the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the common section ends, or may end at the timing when the common section ends, and the delay time elapses after the common section ends. It may be configured to end by the above, may be configured to end when the delay time has elapsed, or may be configured to end after the delay time has elapsed. However, among the common section of the special winning opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is most likely to be noticed by the player, and the large prize is the second most noticeable. Considering that it is the mouth 32a, the common section ends at the same time as the common effect, or the common section ends after the common effect ends, and then the signal from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot. It is preferable that the output is started.

(29) The signal output from the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at the timing when the common section ends in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A and the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B as in the above embodiment. In the configuration, the common effect may be finished before the timing, or the common effect may be finished after the timing. However, among the common section of the special winning opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, considering that the symbol display device 41 is most likely to be noticed by the player, the common effect is the above timing. It is preferable that the configuration is completed at the same timing or at a timing earlier than that.

(30) The delay time of the signal output may be different among the plurality of types of switching execution modes that are the targets of the signal output delay to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot. For example, like the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, the opening/closing execution mode in which the special winning opening 32a is opened for a long time after the common section is opened/closed in the pattern A triggered by the explicit high-precision jackpot result A. A configuration in which the special winning opening 32a is opened/closed in a short time mode may be shorter than the opening/closing execution mode in which the high-frequency support mode is set after the common section, such as the execution mode. In this case, in the former opening/closing execution mode, it is preferable to perform the external output at a timing before the opening of the special winning opening 32a due to a long time mode, whereas in the latter opening/closing execution mode, for example, a special disconnection result is generated. In some cases, it may be preferable to delay the external output until the ending of the opening/closing execution mode is started in order to share the operation mode with the opening/closing execution mode. In such a case, it is preferable to prepare the first delay time for the former opening/closing execution mode and the second delay time for the latter opening/closing execution mode.

Note that the delay time is not limited to the configuration in which two types are set, and may be a configuration in which three types or four or more types are set. Further, the delay time may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with the type of opening/closing execution mode to be the delay target of the external output, or the delay time may be set for each predetermined combination. Good.

(31) Even if the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is a terminal used to output not only the information indicating that it is in the open/close execution mode but also the information indicating that it is in the high-frequency support mode Good. For example, in the case of a game mode transition mode in which the open/close execution mode of the pattern B is followed by the high-frequency support mode, when the external output is started in the middle of the open/close execution mode of the pattern B, the external output is opened/closed. The configuration may be such that it continues after the execution mode ends, and continues during the high-frequency support mode. Also, for example, in the case of a game state transition mode in which the open/close execution mode of the pattern A is followed by the high-frequency support mode, if the external output is started in the middle of the open/close execution mode of the pattern A, the external output May continue after the open/close execution mode ends, and may continue during the high-frequency support mode.

(32) In the low-probability jackpot result A and the implicit high-probability jackpot result A, external output may not be performed regardless of the type of support mode when the game result is obtained. That is, in the case of a game result in which the degree of advantage of a specific factor is not shifted from disadvantage to advantage between executions of a specific game state, or a specific game state that proceeds in a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is low. In the case of a game result in which it is not possible to shift the advantage degree of a specific factor from disadvantage to advantage with the execution of, the external output may not be performed. In this configuration, even if the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed with the special deviation result, the low-probability jackpot result A, or the implicit high-probability jackpot result A as the trigger, the opening/closing operation is performed. After the execution mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict which game result has triggered.

(33) As a game mode transition mode, if the low-probability jackpot result is in the high-probability mode, the high-frequency support mode is set after the opening/closing execution mode, but if the low-probability jackpot result is in the low-probability mode. A transition mode in which the low frequency support mode is set after the opening/closing execution mode may be set in the. In this case, in the former case, external output is performed during the open/close execution mode, but in the latter case, external output may not be performed during the open/close execution mode.

(34) The specific element or the specific means for changing the degree of advantage of the player after the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to the configuration in the support mode, and may be the configuration in the win/loss lot mode.

In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes possible to win the special winning device or the winning is likely to occur, and based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning device, the advantageous opening and closing for the player without going through the win/loss lottery. A configuration for selectively performing external output may be applied to the configuration for shifting to the execution mode. For example, after the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win the special winning device or the winning is likely to occur, and after the opening/closing execution mode, the special winning device is not possible or the winning is less likely to occur. In the configuration in which the mode is set, external output is performed during the opening/closing execution mode when the first mode is set after the opening/closing execution mode, but when the second mode is set after the opening/closing execution mode, a transition trigger is generated. Even if the result is a big hit, the external output may not be performed during the opening/closing execution mode.

It should be noted that, in the special winning device, a game ball that has won the special winning device can pass, and an advantageous port in which a transition to the open/close execution mode occurs without passing through a win/loss lot based on the passing and the special winning device. There is a disadvantage that the winning game ball can pass and does not cause a transition to the open/close execution mode even if it passes, and a distribution path that distributes the game ball that has won the special winning device to either an advantageous or a disadvantage Alternatively, the distribution device may be provided, and the distribution mode of the game balls may be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

(35) A mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high is the opening of the special winning opening 32a in a long time mode, and a mode in which the expectation of grant of a predetermined privilege is relatively low is short time. The embodiment is not limited to the configuration in which the special winning opening 32a is opened, and is arbitrary.

For example, the number of prize balls is relatively large (eg, 10 to 15) when a prize is paid to the special winning opening 32a, and a prize ball when a prize is paid to the special winning opening 32a. A small payout mode in which the number is relatively small (for example, 1 or 2) may be set. In this case, for example, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, it is configured to shift to the section of the multi-payment mode after the section of the small-payment mode has elapsed, and after the section of the small-payment mode is started, The external output may be performed until the section ends or the section in the multiple payout mode starts.

Further, for example, the opening and closing of the pattern A is performed by providing a plurality of variable winning apparatuses in which the number of prize balls when the winning is generated are different as described above and selecting the variable winning apparatus corresponding to the small payout mode as the opening target. The mode may be performed, or the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B may be performed by changing the opening target from the variable winning device corresponding to the small payout mode to the variable winning device corresponding to the multiple payout mode.

(36) In the above embodiment, in order to make the hall computer HC recognize that it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the main controller is connected to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot during the opening/closing execution mode satisfying a predetermined condition. Although the signal is output from 71, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal is basically output from the main controller 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. The signal output may be stopped during the opening/closing execution mode satisfying the conditions. Even with this configuration, it is possible to recognize that the hall computer HC is in the open/close execution mode. In addition, you may apply the structure of such a signal output to the signal output of a support mode type|system|group.

(37) The timing at which the external output is started in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern D is not limited to that in the above-described embodiment, and for example, the external output is started when the waiting time for opening has passed a predetermined time. The external output may be started when the waiting time for opening has elapsed, or the external output may be started when the opening of the first special winning opening 32a is started. Good. Further, the start timing of the external output is set to the start timing of the external output from the jackpot external terminal 81a or the start timing of the external output from the open/close execution mode external terminal 81b in the switching execution modes of patterns A to C. You may apply to it.

(38) As a specific configuration for delaying the external output through the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot, instead of the configuration for measuring the delay time from the start of the switching execution mode, for example, during the switching execution mode It is determined whether a condition such as whether the opening of the special winning opening 32a for the reference number of times has started, is being opened, or has ended, and if the condition is satisfied, an external device for conditional jackpot It may be configured to start external output through the terminal 81c. Even in this case, it is possible to delay the external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c.

For example, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, it is determined whether or not the opening times according to the last short-time aspect included in the common section have ended, and if the opening times have ended, the external through the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot Alternatively, the output may be started. Instead of this, it is determined whether or not it is the timing immediately before the opening time in the first long time mode is started, and if it is the timing, the conditional jackpot It may be configured to start external output through the external terminal 81c.

In addition, for example, at the timing when the waiting time for ending is started in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A in which the support mode of the electric accessory 34a becomes the high-frequency support mode after the end, or during the waiting time for ending. Alternatively, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the measurement of the waiting time for ending is finished, and if it is the timing, the external output through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started.

(39) The type of the open/close execution mode selected depending on the win/loss lottery mode or the support mode when the shift to the open/close execution mode is performed may be different, and the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 may be configured differently. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the pending information is acquired separately for the occurrence of a prize, and the type of the open/close execution mode selected is different due to the difference in the conditions that triggered the acquisition of the pending information. In such a configuration, the time period during which the common section continues may be different depending on whether the switching to the open/close execution mode in the first situation or the switching to the open/close execution mode in the second situation. In this case, the MPU 92 of the main control unit 71 determines whether the situation is the first situation or the second situation, and the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is passed through at the timing when the delay time corresponding to each of them has passed. It is preferable to start the signal output.

(40) In the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2, a type for defining the gaming state after the execution of the opening/closing execution mode such as the low-probability jackpot result, the implicit high-precision jackpot result, the explicit high-probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a counter for performing the lottery and selecting the open/close execution mode is separately provided. In this case, in the table in which the counter and the opening/closing execution mode pattern corresponding to the numerical information of the counter are associated with each other, the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode to at least the middle timing is specified. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of being in a different form is defined so as to differ depending on the contents to be executed thereafter.

Alternatively, the jackpot type counter C2 may be omitted, and all game results may be distributed using the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1.

Further, instead of using the jackpot random number counter C1 to randomly select the occurrence or non-occurrence of the special deviation result, a counter dedicated to the special deviation result is separately provided to determine whether or not the special deviation result is generated using the counter. It may be configured. Further, the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a may be different, and a plurality of types of special deviation results may be set. However, even in this case, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to each special deviation result, the special winning opening 32a is opened in a short time mode in the above-described embodiment, etc. It is preferable that the winning of the mouth 32a does not occur.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the high-probability mode compared to the low-probability mode, the probability of a special out-of-range result is low, but instead, the probability of a special out-of-range result is the same or substantially the same in both modes. A certain configuration may be used, a configuration in which the high probability mode has a higher probability of having a special deviation result, or a configuration in which the special deviation result does not occur in the high probability mode may be used.

(41) Hold information related to winning in the upper working opening 33 and hold information related to winning in the lower working opening 34 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working opening 34 takes precedence. The configuration in which the digestion is performed may be applied, or conversely, the configuration in which the reservation information related to winning in the upper operation port 33 is preferentially digested may be applied.

Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 34 are provided on the left and right. The structure may be arranged in parallel, or both of these operating ports may be arranged obliquely. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 55, both operation ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the first operation port or only the second operation port can be won.

Further, in the above-described configuration, the main display section 43 has a first display area for displaying the result of the judgment on whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 and the winning of the lower working opening 34. It is also possible to provide a second display area for displaying the result of determination of whether or not the held information has been held. In this case, the variable information of the pattern is displayed in the first display area based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operation opening 33 is the target of the winning/disapproving determination or is the target of the winning/disapproving determination. Is started and the stop result corresponding to the win/fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game time is ended. In addition, based on the fact that the hold information obtained based on the winning of the lower working opening 34 is the target of the winning/unlocking determination or the target of the winning/failing determination, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area. At the same time as the start, the stop result corresponding to the win/no judgment is displayed, and the variation display for one game is ended.

(42) Depending on whether the hold information related to winning in the upper working opening 33 is the target of the winning/disabling judgment, or the holding information related to winning in the lower working opening 34 is the target of the winning/failing judgment. The profits obtained may be different. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, when the hold information related to winning in the upper operation opening 33 is the target of the winning/disapproval determination, the game result is distributed as in the above embodiment, but the lower operation is performed. When the hold information related to the winning in the mouth 34 is the object of the winning/disabling determination and the big hit is won, it may be distributed to either the most advantageous big hit result or the low certainty big hit result C.

In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided, the number of operating ports is not limited to two and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

(43) The symbol display device 41 or a dedicated display device may be configured to notify the number of executions of a predetermined opening/closing execution mode, the number of game executions, and the high frequency support mode. In this case, instead of or in addition to the configuration related to the external output in the above-described embodiment, when a transition to the open/close execution mode occurs, the sub-side control device (the voice emission control device 72 in the above-described embodiment) or a dedicated display. A configuration in which the signal output timing to the container is delayed, or a configuration in which no signal is output even if the switching execution mode is entered in a predetermined situation may be applied. Further, the first output mode in which the signal is output in the same manner as the external output to the jackpot external terminal 81a in the above-described embodiment, and the external output to the external terminal 81b for the switching execution mode in the above-described embodiment. A second output mode in which the signal is output in the same manner as the output, and a signal in the same manner as the external output to the external jack 81c for the conditional jackpot in the above embodiment. The three output modes may be stored in advance in the program of the main control device 71, and the game hall manager or the like may select any of the above output modes by operating a predetermined manual operation unit.

In addition, a storage device for storing the duration of the open/close execution mode and the duration of the high-frequency support mode in a predetermined mode according to a signal output from the main control device 71 or another control device is installed. The above configuration may be applied to the configuration. The storage device is considered to be used when performing nail adjustment according to the pitch of a game ball, and it is possible to output a signal suitable for managing the nail adjustment.

(44) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 111 is controlled by the sound emission control device 72 based on the command output from the main control device 71, the display control is performed based on the command output from the main control device 71. The device 111 may control the audio emission control device 72. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 71, and both functions of the both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 71. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the audio emission control device 72 and the configuration of the command output from the audio emission control device 72 to the display control device 111 are arbitrary.

(45) The device in which the game-use effect is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the game-use effect is executed by the operation of the movable decorative member. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a game light effect is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a game time effect may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above aspects. Good.

(46) In the above embodiment, one game time is started on the main display portion 43 based on the fact that the main control device 71 makes a win/fail judgment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the conditions for making a win/fail judgment in the main controller 71 are satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the win/fail judgment is actually made, and based on the fact that the win/fail judgment is made thereafter. The display mode, the display duration time, and the stop result after that in the game time may be determined. In this case, in the main control device 71, when it is the start timing of the game time, first, the variation command is transmitted, and after that, when the winning/failing determination, the determination of the display duration time and the type determination are performed, the time command and the type The configuration may be such that commands are transmitted, or the transmission timings of these time commands and type commands may be shifted.

(47) In the above embodiment, the stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed on the main display unit 43. However, instead of this, the main display unit 43 may be omitted, and any game result may be obtained. However, the common stop result may be displayed on the main display unit 43, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the main display unit 43, so that the main display unit 43 may eventually display the stop result. It may be configured such that it cannot be identified whether the game result is.

(48) In the display screen G, the game result is specified separately from the symbols (specifically, the symbols scrolled on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3) that are variably displayed for performing the game diversion. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a design (design) for displaying is displayed. For example, on the display screen G, a clarification area corresponding to at least one of a narrower area and an edge area than the area in which the effect design is displayed is displayed, and at the time of ending the game in this clarification area. It may be configured such that a display corresponding to the game result is made. In this case, the display may be performed by a pattern of a lighting color in one divisional portion or a plurality of divisional portions, or may be performed by a pattern of characters or patterns that are difficult to identify.

In addition, the display contents may be hard to be recognized by anyone other than those who are familiar with the correspondence relationship between the display contents and the game results because the display contents are similar between the game results. In this case, the game hall manager or the like can grasp the game result through the display while making it difficult for the player to grasp the game result through the display. Further, in the above-mentioned clarification area, the variable display or the switching display may be performed while the game time is continuing, and the display is not performed during the game time, but the stop result is displayed when the game time is finished. It may be configured to be.

(49) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The characteristic configuration of the above-described embodiment can be applied to a pachinko machine that gives a big hit when entering, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the game in the opening/closing execution mode using the variable winning device are different from those in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be basically omitted.

FIG. 36(a) is a front view of the game board 231 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 36(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the first variable winning device 236 provided on the game board 231. 36(c) is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the second variable winning device 237 provided on the game board 231.

An inner rail portion 232 and an outer rail portion 233 are attached to the surface of the game board 231, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 232 and the outer rail portion 233. Further, the inner rail portion 232 and the outer rail portion 233 constitute a guide ball 234 for guiding the game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism by the player rotating the launch handle 55 The guide rail 234 guides the player to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 234 is formed so that its exit portion faces the center of the upper part of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 55 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side opposite to the side of the guide rail 234 where the exit portion is formed. Shift to the department side. The exit portion of the guide rail 234 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the area defined as the game area on the game board 231 by the router processing. In each opening, a general winning opening 235, a first variable winning device 236, a second variable winning device 237, an upper working opening (first starting ball entering section) 238, a lower working opening (second starting ball entering section) 239, A through gate 241, a variable display unit 242, a main display section 243, a accessory display section 244, etc. are provided respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 235, the first variable winning device 236, the second variable winning device 237, the upper working opening 238 and the lower working opening 239, it is detected that it is arranged on the back side of the game board 231. It is detected by a sensor (not shown), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working port 238 and a ball enters the lower working port 239, three prize balls are paid out, and a ball entering the general winning port 235 is paid. When it occurs, the payout of 10 prize balls is executed, and when the first variable winning device 236 receives a ball and when the second variable winning device 237 receives a ball, 15 prize balls are paid out. Prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls associated with the lower operation port 239 is larger than the number of prize balls associated with the upper operation port 238. It may be different. Further, for example, the number of prize balls related to the second variable prize device 237 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the first variable prize device 236, or the first variable prize device 236 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the second variable prize device 237. The number of prize balls of the two variable winning devices 236 and 237 may be different from each other, such that the number of prize balls related to is large.

In addition, an out port 245 is provided at the bottom of the game board 231, and game balls that have not entered the various winning ports or the like are discharged from the game area through the out port 245. Further, on the game board 231, a large number of nails 246 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

The upper working port 238 and the lower working port 239 are unitized as a working port device and installed on the game board 231. Both the upper working port 238 and the lower working port 239 are open upward. Further, both the operation ports 238 and 239 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 238 is located above. The lower working port 239 is provided with an electric accessory 239a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 239a is connected to an electric accessory driving unit 239b mounted on the back side of the game board 231, and is driven by the electric accessory driving unit 239b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is placed in either the open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 239a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the lower working opening 239, and when the electric accessory 239a is opened, the lower working opening 239 can be entered.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a state in which a game ball is easily won into the lower working opening 239 and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur than a state in which a prize is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur are electrically driven. The accessory 239a may be switched. Alternatively, the electric accessory 239a may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a prize is likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the lower working port 239 itself.

The main display portion 243 and the accessory display portion 244 are provided on a decorative member 247 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 247 extends from the board surface of the game board 231 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 247 faces the window panel 57 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further with the window panel 57. The distance between them is smaller than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 247.

The main display portion 243 and the accessory display portion 244 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 247. In other words, the main display portion 243 and the accessory display portion 244 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 57 of the front door frame 14, and the front of both of these display portions 243 and 244 are displayed as game balls. It is prevented from falling.

On the main display portion 243, the first result display portion 243a for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning on the upper working opening 238, and on the basis of the winning on the lower working opening 239. The second result display section 243b for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery is set. In addition to the result display sections 243a and 243b, in the main display section 243, when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the round game is set (or the opening/closing execution mode is set), the round game in the opening/closing execution mode is displayed. A round display unit may be provided to clearly indicate the number of times.

In the first result display unit 243a, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper working opening 238 as a trigger, and the result of the stop of the variable display is the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 238. The result is clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the upper operation opening 238 is the result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 243a and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, the mode shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the second result display unit 243b, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the lower working opening 239 as a trigger, and the result of the stop of the variable display is the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 239. The result is clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower working opening 239 is the result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 243b and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, the mode shifts to the open/close execution mode.

The main display section 243 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by another type of display device such as a CRT or a dot matrix. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 243, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality of types are displayed. A configuration in which the colors of the seeds are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the accessory display unit 244, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 241 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 241 is displayed as the stop result of the variable display. It is specified by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 241 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 244 and the variable display is displayed. After the power supply is stopped, the state changes to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 239a provided in the lower operation port 239 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 242 is provided with a symbol display device 251 that variably displays (or variably or switches) a symbol, which is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 242 is provided with a center frame 252 so as to surround the symbol display device 251. An upper portion of the center frame 252 extends to the front of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 251, and there is no inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. ing.

The symbol display device 251 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 251 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the symbol display device 251, the variable display of symbols is started based on the winning of the upper working opening 238 or the lower working opening 239. That is, when the variable display is performed on the first result display section 243a of the main display section 243 and when the variable display is performed on the second result display section 243b of the main display section 243, in the symbol display device 251 accordingly. Variable display is performed. The display contents on the symbol display device 251 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the area on the lower left side on the front surface side of the center frame 252, a first holding lamp section 253 corresponding to the first result display section 243a and the pattern display device 251 is provided. The maximum number of game balls that have won the upper working opening 238 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the first reserve lamp section 253. Further, on the lower right side on the front surface side of the center frame 252, a second hold lamp section 254 corresponding to the second result display section 243b and the pattern display device 251 is provided. The number of gaming balls that have won the lower working opening 239 is reserved up to a maximum of 4, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the second holding lamp section 254.

On the upper part of the center frame 252, a third holding lamp section 255 corresponding to the accessory display section 244 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 241 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by turning on the third suspension lamp unit 255. Note that each of the holding lamp units 253-255 may be configured to be displayed on a part of the symbol display device 251.

The first variable winning device 236 provided below the variable display unit 242 (that is, below the display screen G of the symbol display device 251) is, as shown in FIG. 36(b), the back side of the game board 231. It is provided with a first special winning opening 236a that leads to, and a first opening/closing door 236b that opens and closes the first special winning opening 236a.

The first opening/closing door 236b is connected to a first variable winning prize drive unit 236c integrally provided as a first variable winning prize device 236 (coupling points are not shown), and is driven by the first variable winning prize drive unit 236c. And is placed in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state where the game ball cannot be won, and when the internal lottery wins the transition to the open/close execution mode, the game ball is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be won.

In addition, the first variable winning device 236 is formed with a winning passage portion 236d at a position where a game ball that has won the first variable winning device 236 through the first big winning opening 236a is sure to pass through. The variable winning detection sensor 236e is provided such that the detection unit is present at the position of the winning passage unit 236d. The game balls that have won the first variable winning device 236 are individually detected by the variable winning detection sensor 236e. A magnetic detection sensor is used as the variable winning detection sensor 236e, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball.

The second variable winning device 237 provided above the variable display unit 242 (that is, above the display screen G of the symbol display device 251) is, as shown in FIG. 36C, the rear side of the game board 231. It is provided with a second special winning opening 237a leading to and a second opening/closing door 237b for opening and closing the second special winning opening 237a.

The second opening/closing door 237b is connected to a second variable winning drive unit 237c that is integrally provided as a second variable winning device 237 (a connecting portion is not shown), and is driven by the second variable winning drive unit 237c. And is placed in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state where the game ball cannot be won, and when the internal lottery wins the transition to the open/close execution mode, the game ball is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be won.

Further, in the second variable winning device 237, a continuation passing portion 237d is formed at a position where a game ball won in the second variable winning device 237 surely passes through the second special winning opening 237a. The continuous winning detection sensor 237e is provided so that the detection unit is located at the position of the continuous passage unit 237d. The continuous winning detection sensor 237e individually detects the game balls that have won the second variable winning device 237. A magnetic detection sensor is used as the continuous winning detection sensor 237e, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball.

Here, the positions of the first variable winning device 236 and the second variable winning device 237 in the game area will be described.

The variable display unit 242 is arranged on the center side of the game area so that the flow-down area of the game ball is secured in the upper, lower, left and right thereof. That is, in the game area, as a flow-down area of the game ball, a flow-down area AR1 above the variable display unit 242, a flow-down area AR2 below the variable display unit 242, a flow-down area AR3 to the left of the variable display unit 242, and a variable display. There is a downflow area AR4 to the right of the unit 242. The center frame 252 that constitutes a part of the variable display unit 242 is provided below the center frame 252 because the roof unit 256 that constitutes a part extending from the upper part to the left and right sides extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. With the exception of the game balls introduced to the stage 257, the game balls flowing down the game area do not traverse or cross the variable display unit 242.

As described above, the first variable winning device 236 is provided below the variable display unit 242, and this position corresponds to the downward flow area AR2. Here, each of the flow-down areas AR1 to AR4 is provided with a dispersion member for dispersing the flow-down direction of the game ball by collision with the game ball, and the flow-down direction of the game ball with the game ball. A guide member for guiding in a predetermined direction by a collision is provided. The dispersing member includes the nail 246, the guiding member includes the roof unit 256, and the decorative member 247 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area. Then, the dispersion member and the guide member can flow down toward the first variable winning device 236 regardless of which position in the upper part of the game area the game ball shot from the game ball launch mechanism reaches. Is provided.

The second variable winning device 237 is provided above the variable display unit 242 as described above, and this position corresponds to the upper flow-down area AR1. However, this position is a position closer to the center in the horizontal direction in the upper flow-down area AR1. Therefore, the game ball that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51 and has started to flow down from the lateral center in the upper downflow area AR1 can flow down toward the second variable winning a prize device 237, but the game ball is launched. The game ball that has been launched from the mechanism 51 and has started to flow down from the lateral end portion side in the upper downflow area AR1 cannot flow down toward the second variable winning device 237.

As described above, the winning of the first variable winning device 236 can occur regardless of the position of the game ball starting to flow down from any position in the upper downflow area AR1, whereas the winning of the second variable winning device 237 is possible. The winning may occur when the game ball starts to flow down from a position near the center in the horizontal direction in the upper flow-down area AR1. That is, in the upper downflow area AR1, the range of the reaching position that enables the downward flow toward the first variable winning device 236 is more than the range of the reaching position that allows the downward direction toward the second variable winning device 237. Widely set.

However, the upper working port 238 and the lower working port 239 are provided at positions above the first variable winning device 236 in the lower flow-down area AR2. Therefore, even if the game ball is being launched in anticipation of winning the first variable winning device 236, if the game ball wins the upper working opening 238 or the lower working opening 239, It does not reach the 1-variable winning device 236. In particular, when the electric accessory 239a of the lower working opening 239 is in the open state, the game balls that have reached the lower flow area AR2 have a high probability of winning in the lower working opening 239, and win the first variable winning device 236. The probability of doing it is low. On the other hand, in the upper downflow area AR1, there is no winning part other than the second variable winning award device 237, and the game ball that has reached a position in the upper downflow area AR1 toward the center in the lateral direction is the second variable winning award device. It is easy to win 237.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitoring board 95 that monitors the power supply. In the main control device 71, a board box for accommodating the main control board 91 or the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening may be provided. .. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies that constitute the substrate box are inseparably connected and the structure of a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is an object to be adhered when peeling off. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off when left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is conceivable that an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box.

The MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 which stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory which temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 92, the power failure monitoring board 95 and the payout controller 78 provided in the main controller 71 are connected. In this case, a power supply and a firing control device 79 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 95, and power is supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 95.

Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The various sensors include a variable winning detection sensor 236e provided in the first variable winning device 236, a continuous winning detection sensor 237e provided in the second variable winning device 237, and other winning detection sensors 96a to 96d. ing. Further, the other prize detection sensors 96a to 96d are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the prize-winning ball portions such as the general winning opening 235, the upper working opening 238, the lower working opening 239, and the through gate 241. A sensor is included. In the MPU 92, the winning determination (winning determination) to each winning portion is performed based on the detection results of these winning detection sensors 236e, 237e, 96a to 96d. Further, in the MPU 92, various kinds of lottery are executed based on the winning of the upper working opening 238 or the lower working opening 239.

To the output side of the MPU 92, the power failure monitoring board 95, the payout control device 78 and the sound emission control device 72 are connected. To the payout control device 78, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of the prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball portion.

Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 72. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 72 is electrically connected to the main control device 71 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 92, a first variable winning a prize driving unit 236c that opens and closes the first opening and closing door 236b of the first variable winning a prize device 236 and a second opening and closing door 237b of the second variable winning a prize device 237 are opened and closed. The second variable winning drive unit 237c, the electric accessory driving unit 239b for opening and closing the electric accessory 239a of the lower working port 239, the main display unit 243, and the accessory display unit 244 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the first variable winning drive unit 236c and the second variable winning drive unit 237c so that the first special winning opening 236a and the second special winning opening 237a are opened and closed. To be done. When the electric accessory 239a is in the open state, the MPU 92 controls the driving of the electric accessory driving unit 239b so that the electric accessory 239a is opened and closed. Further, at each game time, the display control of the main display portion 243 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 239a, the display control of the accessory display unit 244 is executed in the MPU 92.

The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power supply and firing control device 79, and also monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 V output from the power supply and firing control device 79. The payout control device 78 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 77 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

The power supply and launch control device 79 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 91, the payout control device 78, and the like are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply and firing control device 79 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, so that even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 71.

Further, the power supply and the launch control device 79 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 51 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 234 of the game board 231, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 61a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 234, and the game ball is supplied with a drive signal from the power supply and the firing control device 79 to the solenoid. Is fired.

The sound emission control device 72 includes a sound emission control board 101 on which the MPU 102 is mounted. The MPU 102 includes a ROM 103 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 103 is executed. A RAM 104, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are built in.

The MPU 102 drives and controls the various lamp units 58, 253-255 and the speaker unit 59 based on the command received from the main control unit 71. Further, the command resulting from the analysis of these commands is transmitted to the display control device 111. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 72 is electrically connected to the display control device 111 via connector units (connection units) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which an MPU 113, which is an element in which a program ROM 114 and a work RAM 115 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 116, a character ROM 117, and a video RAM 118 are mounted. Equipped with.

The MPU 113 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 72 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 116 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 116).

The program ROM 114 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 113 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information. The work RAM 115 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 113 executes various programs, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply when holding the stored information. Is.

The VDP 116 is a kind of drawing circuit for directly operating an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the design display device 251. Since the VDP 116 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 116 adjusts the timings of the MPU 113, the video RAM 118 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and at the same time, reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 118 from the character ROM 117 and displays it on the symbol display device 251.

The character ROM 117 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 251. The character ROM 117 holds bit map format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

The video RAM 118 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 251, and the display contents of the symbol display device 251 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 118.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in MPU 92 of main controller 71>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery by the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 92 uses various counter information at the time of playing a game, and performs jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the main display portion 243, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 251, setting of display of the accessory display portion 244, and the like. , Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 251 fluctuate Reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the first result display section 243a and the second result display section 243b of the main display section 243, The variation type counter CS that determines the display duration time in the symbol display device 251 is used. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 239a of the lower operation port 239 is placed in the power open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer, each numerical value information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the RAM 94 when a winning is generated in the upper working opening 238 or the lower working opening 239. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a provided as the acquisition information storage means.

The reserved ball storage area 94a includes a first result display section reserved area Ra, a second result display section reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The 1st result display part reservation area Ra provided as a 1st acquisition information storage means is equipped with four storage areas, 1st area Ra1-4th area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing one combination of a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3, and matches the winning of a game ball to the upper working opening 238. Thus, the one set of combinations is stored in time series. Specifically, in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4, when the winning to the upper working opening 238 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area Ra1→the second area Ra2→the third area Ra3→the fourth area Ra4. Numerical information is stored in chronological order. Since the four storage areas are provided in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 238 is stored in a maximum of four. Further, the first result display holding area Ra is provided with a holding information number storage area in which the number of holding information stored in the area is written.

The storable number of the hold information related to the upper operating port 238 is not limited to four and may be any number, and may be other plural number such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas, namely, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the storage areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3, and is used for winning a game ball into the lower working opening 239. Together, the one set of combinations is stored in time series. Specifically, in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4, when the winning to the lower working opening 239 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area Rb1→the second area Rb2→the third area Rb3→the fourth area Rb4. Numerical information is stored in chronological order. Since the four storage areas are provided in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the lower working port 239 is stored in a reserved manner up to a maximum of four. Further, the second result display holding area Rb is provided with a holding information number storage area in which the number of holding information stored in the area is written.

The storable number of the hold information related to the lower operation port 239 is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The execution area AE stores each value stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb when the variable display of the result display areas 243a and 243b is started. This is an area for moving.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electricity reserve area 94c of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 241. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not the electric accessory 239a is controlled to be in the open state by the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

Here, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 239a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in the same manner to the game area, the electric accessory 239a of the lower working port 239 is opened per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or the low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or the high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of is relatively high or low.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 238 or the lower working opening 239. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 238, and the second result display unit of the RAM 94 is stored when the game ball wins the lower working port 239. It is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The value of the random number that is a big hit is stored as a win/loss table (win/win information group) in the win/win table storage area 93a as a win/win information group storage unit in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the hit/miss table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, as the win/loss table, the win/loss table (low probability win/win information group) for the low probability mode of FIG. 39(a) and the win/fail table (high win/loss) of the high probability mode of FIG. 39(b). Probability information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode (low-probability state) and the high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 39(a), there are two random number values for the jackpot win. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the value of the random number for the jackpot win is 21. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot win in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot win in the high probability mode.

If the probability of winning in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that win the prize are arbitrary, and the jackpot random numbers that win the jackpot in the situation of the low-probability mode. The value group of the counter C1 may or may not include a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation of the high probability mode.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery result will be a result other than the value of the random number that is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, as a result of the miss, a special miss result (small hit result) and a normal miss result Two types are set. Neither the special out-of-range result nor the normal out-of-place result triggers the transition to the winning/failing lottery mode or the support mode, but the special out-of-range result triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the normal out-of-place result switches to the opening/closing execution mode. Is not a trigger for the transition.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 238 or the lower working opening 239. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 238, and the second result display unit of the RAM 94 is stored when the game ball wins the lower working port 239. It is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 93b as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 93. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 40, as a distribution table, a first distribution table (first distribution information group) in FIG. 40(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information) in FIG. 40(b). Group) and are set.

The first distribution table distributes to the reservation information shifted from the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, to the holding information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 238. It is a table that is referred to when a lottery is performed. In the first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 40(a), as a distribution destination of the game result, a low probability result (a special game result corresponding to a low probability), a small round high accuracy result (a small round corresponding latency height). Probability result), high accuracy result for implicit branch (latent high probability result for multiple rounds), high accuracy result for explicit branch (explicit high probability result), most advantageous result (special game result for high probability) ing.

Each of the above game results is (1) a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning devices 236, 237 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after completion of the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) after completion of the opening/closing execution mode. There is a difference in at least one of the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 239a of the lower operation port 239.

If the lottery mode of (2) is explained among these conditions, the low-probability result is that the lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode, whichever the lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode is. The result. The low-probability mode is continued at least until the jackpot is won in the win/loss lottery. On the other hand, high accuracy results for small rounds, high accuracy results for implicit branching, high accuracy results for explicit branching, and the most advantageous results are high in the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the drawing mode before the opening/closing execution mode. It is a game result set in the probability mode. The high-probability mode is continued at least until the jackpot is won in the win/loss lottery.

In addition, if the support mode of (3) is described, the low certainty result is a game result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, whichever the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode is. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In addition, the small round high accuracy result and the implicit branch correspondence high accuracy result are game results in which the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode is maintained as it is. In this case, if the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, it is maintained at least until the jackpot win in the win/loss lottery. Further, the explicit branch correspondence high-accuracy result and the most advantageous result are game results in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, whichever the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode is. The high-frequency support mode is maintained at least until the jackpot is won in the win/loss lottery.

The difference between the open/close execution modes (1) will be described in detail later.

In the first allocation table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low accuracy result and "10 to 14" correspond to the small round high accuracy result. "15-19" corresponds to the high-precision result corresponding to the implicit branch, "20-24" corresponds to the high-precision result corresponding to the explicit branch, and "25-29" is the most advantageous result. It corresponds to.

On the other hand, in the second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 40(b), only the low certainty result and the most advantageous result are set as the distribution destination of the game result. Then, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low accuracy result, and "10 to 29" correspond to the most advantageous result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 251. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 251 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (symbols), and the final stop result is a given correspondence result in the game times in which a predetermined jackpot result is obtained. In the gaming machine, in order to make the player think that it is in a variable display state in which the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result is likely to occur at the stage before the variable display of the symbol (pattern) on the symbol display device 251 is started and before the stop result is derived and displayed. Means the display state of. In addition, as for the assignment correspondence result, specifically, the combination of the symbols with the same numbers is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines.

As in the first embodiment, there are two types of expected effects, a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the addition correspondence result in the stage before the reach display occurs. It is set.

Next, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 92 determines the display duration time on the main display unit 243 and the symbol display duration time on the symbol display device 251. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the fluctuation display on the main display portion 243 and at the time of determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 251.

<Various processes executed by main controller 71>
Next, a processing configuration in this embodiment executed by the MPU 92 in the main control device 71 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is activated by the MPU 92 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S1601, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors 236e, 237e, 96a to 96d including the variable winning detection sensor 236e and the continuous winning detection sensor 237e are read, and the states of these various winning detection sensors 236e, 237e, 96a to 96d are read. A process of determining and saving the winning detection information is executed. Further, when the winning detection sensor 236e, 237e, 96a to 96d corresponding to the generation of the prize ball has detected the prize of the game ball, the prize for instructing the payout controller 78 to pay the prize ball. Set the sphere command. For example, when the winning of the first variable winning device 236 is detected, or when the winning of the second variable winning device 237 is detected, to designate 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number, Set the prize ball command of. In the following step S1602, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In subsequent step S1603, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when they reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 94.

In a succeeding step S1604, a through winning process associated with winning of the through gate 241 is executed. In the through winning process, when a winning has occurred in the through gate 241, the number of stored accessory holdings stored in the electric role holding area 94c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). As a condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S1603 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 94c. Further, the voice light emission control device 72 is subjected to a process for turning on the third holding lamp unit 255 corresponding to the number of stored accessory holdings.

After that, in step S1605, after the winning process for the operating port is executed, the timer interrupt process is ended.

<Winning process for working port>
The winning process for the operating port in step S1605 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the upper working opening 238 (starting winning). If the upper working opening 238 is won, the number of holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra is grasped in step S1702, and the grasped number is stored in the first start holding memory. Set as a number RaN. After that, the processing from step S1705 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1701 that the game ball has not won the upper working opening 238, it is determined in step S1703 whether the game ball has won (start winning) the lower working opening 239. .. When the lower working opening 239 has not been won, the main winning process is ended as it is. When the lower working opening 239 is won, the number of holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb is grasped in step S1704, and the grasped number is stored in the second start holding memory. Set as a number RbN. After that, the processing from step S1705 is executed.

In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of pending start memories set in step S1702 or step S1704 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). When the number N of starting pending memories is the upper limit value, the main winning process is ended as it is. If the number N of startup pending storages is less than the upper limit value, the number N of startup pending storages of the corresponding result display holding area is updated to be incremented by 1 in step S1706.

In the following step S1707, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1603 are set to the first storage area of the corresponding free storage area for the result display section. That is, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages updated in step S1706.

That is, when the first startup pending storage number RaN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1603 are used for the first result display unit. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup holding storage number RaN updated in step S1706.

When the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1603 are used for the second result display unit. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the holding area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start holding storage number RbN updated in step S1706.

After executing the process of step S1707, the main winning process is ended. When the process of step S1707 is executed, the sound emission control device 72 is executed to turn on the first hold lamp unit 253 or the second hold lamp unit 254 corresponding to the number of start hold memories. To do.

<Normal processing>
In the MPU 92 of the present embodiment, in addition to the timer interrupt processing, the normal processing is executed as in the first embodiment. The flow of processing in the normal processing is the same as the normal processing (FIG. 12) in the first embodiment. However, the details of the processing configurations of the data setting process (step S304) and the fluctuation start process (step S305) executed in the game time control process (FIG. 13) of step S203 are different from those of the first embodiment. There is. Further, the details of the processing configuration of the game state transition processing in step S204 are different from those in the first embodiment. These processing configurations will be described below.

<Data setting process>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the data setting process in this embodiment.

In the data setting process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold storage number RbN held and stored in the second result display holding area Rb is “0”. If the second startup pending storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S1802 to S1806 is executed, and if the second startup pending storage number RbN is not "0". Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S1807 to S1811.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the total number of the hold information is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold storage number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit 243b. If stored, the data stored in the second result display section holding area Rb is set as the end of game play regardless of whether the first start holding storage number RaN is 1 or more. I decided to do it. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display holding area Ra and the second result display holding area Rb, the second result display holding corresponding to the lower working port 239 is held. The pending information stored in the area Rb is preferentially consumed.

In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S1802, the first start hold storage number RaN of the first result display hold area Ra is updated to be subtracted by one. In subsequent step S1803, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S1804, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Ra1 and also to the second area Ra2→ The data in each area is shifted such as the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3→the second area Ra2, the fourth area Ra4→the third area Ra3.

In the following step S1805, if the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 94, it is cleared, and if it is not set, that state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variable display is the first result display unit 243a or the second result display unit 243b.

In a succeeding step S1806, a shift command, which is information for causing the audio emission control device 72 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted, is set. In this case, the shift including the information that the area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first result display holding area Ra, that is, the information that it corresponds to the upper operation port 238. Set hour command. Then, this data setting process is completed. By transmitting the shift command, the voice emission control device 72 executes a process for changing the display on the first holding lamp unit 253 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings.

In the data setting process for the second result display section, first, in step S1807, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display hold area Rb is updated to be subtracted by one. In the following step S1808, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second result display holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

Then, in step S1809, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Rb1 and also to the second area Rb2→ The data in each area is shifted such that the first area Rb1, the third area Rb3→the second area Rb2, the fourth area Rb4→the third area Rb3.

In a succeeding step S1810, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 94, the second result display unit flag is stored, and if it is stored, the state is maintained.

In a succeeding step S1811, a shift command, which is information for causing the audio emission control device 72 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted, is set. In this case, the shift including the information that the area targeted for the shift of the current data corresponds to the second result display holding area Rb, that is, the information that the area corresponds to the lower working port 239. Set hour command. Then, this data setting process is completed. By transmitting the shift command, the voice emission control device 72 executes a process for changing the display on the second hold lamp unit 254 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. If it is not in the high probability mode, the success/failure table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 39(a)) is read from the ROM 93 in step S1902, and if it is in the high probability mode, it is used in the high probability mode in step S1903. The win/fail table (see FIG. 39B) is read from the ROM 93.

Then, in step S1904, a win/fail judgment process is executed. Specifically, whether or not the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the numerical information set as the jackpot winning in the winning/losing table read in step S1902 or step S1903. If it does not match with the jackpot numerical value information, it is determined whether or not it matches the numerical value information for special deviation.

In a succeeding step S1905, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination process in step S1904 is the jackpot winning result. If the result is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1906.

In step S1906, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 94. If the second result display unit flag is not set, it means that the current fluctuation start process is executed based on the fact that the hold information related to the upper operation port 238 has been targeted for the game play. In step S1907, the first allocation table (see FIG. 40A) is read from the ROM 93. On the other hand, if the second result display unit flag is set, it means that the current variation start processing is executed based on the fact that the hold information related to the lower operation port 239 has been targeted for the game play. Therefore, in step S1908, the second distribution table (see FIG. 40B) is read from the ROM 93.

Then, in step S1909, distribution determination processing is executed. Specifically, the numerical value information related to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is set in the numerical value range defined in the distribution table read in step S1907 or step S1908 in association with the type of the jackpot result. Which of the above is applicable is specified.

In a succeeding step S1910, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores in advance the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 243a or the second result display section 243b of the main display section 243 in the game time related to the start of fluctuations this time. It is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot results that have been performed, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 94. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the main display unit 243 is set to be different for each type of the jackpot result, and in step S1910, it is specified in step S1909. The RAM 94 stores information on the pattern form according to the type of the jackpot result.

In a succeeding step S1911, a process of setting a flag according to the kind of the jackpot result specified in step S1909 in the RAM 94 is executed. Specifically, when it is specified that the result is low, the low-accuracy result flag is set, and when it is specified that the result is a small round high-accuracy result, the low-round high-accuracy result flag is set and When it is specified that the result is an explicit branch-compatible high-precision result, the implicit flag is set, and when it is specified that the explicit branch-compatible high-precision result is specified, the explicit flag is set and If specified, the most advantageous flag is set. In the following description, it is determined whether or not various jackpot results are obtained by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the RAM 94 is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1905 that it is not the jackpot winning result, it is determined in step S1912 whether or not the result of the hit/miss determination processing in step S1904 is a special out-of-coupling result. If it is the special deviation result, the process proceeds to step S1913.

In step S1913, a stop result setting process for the special disengagement result is executed. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores in advance the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 243a or the second result display section 243b of the main display section 243 in the game time related to the start of fluctuations this time. It is specified from the stop result table for the special extraordinary result, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result. In a succeeding step S1914, the special disengagement flag is set in the RAM 94.

If it is determined in step S1912 that the result is not the special disconnection result, stop result setting processing for normal disconnection result is executed in step S1915. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores in advance the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 243a or the second result display section 243b of the main display section 243 in the game time related to the start of fluctuations this time. It is specified from the stop result table for the normal deviation result, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the special out-of-range result.

After performing any one of step S1911, step S1914, and step S1915, a display continuation time (display continuation period) setting process is performed in step S1916.

In this process, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 94 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 251 in the current game time. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game time relating to the current fluctuation start is the most advantageous result or the low certainty result. Further, even when the result is neither the most advantageous result nor the low probability result, not the other jackpot results and the special outlier result, but the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is reached. If the numerical information corresponds to, it is determined that the reach display is generated.

When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the reach generation display continuation time table stored in the ROM 93 is referred to, the display continuation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired, and the display thereof is displayed. The duration information is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 93 is referred to obtain the display duration information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time. Then, the display duration information is set in the display duration counter. By the way, the display duration that can be obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be obtained by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the display continuation time information when the reach is not generated is displayed as the number of the hold information related to the upper working opening 238 is larger when the hold information related to the upper working opening 238 is a target of playing the game times. When the duration is set to be short and the hold information related to the lower working port 239 is the target of the game times, the display continues as the number of hold information related to the lower working port 239 increases. The time is set to be short. In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the support frequency is the low-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of holding information is the same, the reach non-reach An occurrence display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display continuation time may not change depending on the number of pieces of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when the reach occurs. In addition, a display continuation time table may be set individually for each of the various jackpot results, the special outlier result, the outlier reach time, and the normal outlier result without reach. In this case, the display continuation time is distributed according to each game result.

After the display continuation time setting process is executed in step S1916, the variation command and the type command are set in step S1917. The variation command includes information on the display duration time. Here, as described above, the display duration obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table. Even if the use command does not include the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the audio emission control device 72 which is the sub-side control device can specify the presence or absence of the reach occurrence from the information of the display continuation time. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variation command may include information that directly indicates whether or not the reach has occurred.

Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, in the type command, as the information of the game result, the information of the low probability result, the information of the small round high accuracy result, the information of the high accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, the information of the high accuracy result corresponding to the explicit branch, and the most advantageous result. Information is included.

The variation command and the type command set in step S1917 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The processing performed by the voice emission control device 72 upon receiving these commands will be described later.

After the processing of step S1917 is performed, in step S1918, of the first result display section 243a and the second result display section 243b of the main display section 243, the variation of the pattern in the result display section corresponding to the current game time Start the display. In this case, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 94, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display unit 243a, and the second result display unit flag is set. When set, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit 243b. Then, this fluctuation start processing is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing in this embodiment.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display of the pattern on the main display portion 243 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the game result of the game time ended this time corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result this time is any of the jackpot results or the special outlier result. When it does not correspond to the shift to the open/close execution mode, the main game state shift processing is ended as it is.

If it corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode, in a step S2004, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is a special miss result. If it is the special disengagement result, in step S2005, "2" is set to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. The open/close counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the total number of times of opening and closing the first special winning opening 236a of the first variable winning device 236 and the second special winning opening 237a of the second variable winning device 237.

On the other hand, if it is not the special miss result, that is, if it is one of the jackpot results, in a step S2006, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is a small round high accuracy result. If it is a small round high accuracy result, in step S2007, "2" is set to the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94, and if it is a big hit result other than the small round high accuracy result. Sets "15" to the round counter RC in step S2008. The round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open/close execution mode.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the opening/closing execution mode, the round number defining mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit, and the round game are not set, and the first variable winning device 236 and the second An opening/closing number regulation mode that is ended when the total number of times of opening/closing of the variable winning device 237 reaches the upper limit or the number of winning game balls reaches the upper limit is set. It shifts to the round number regulation mode on the basis of one of the jackpot results, and it shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode on the basis of the special miss result. Here, the round game is (1) that a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed, and (2) the total of the game balls to the first big winning opening 236a and the second big winning opening 237a. It is a game that continues until either one of the following conditions is reached: the number of winning prizes reaches a predetermined upper limit number. By the way, in this embodiment, the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 236a or the second big winning opening 237a is performed once in one round game.

After executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007 or step S2008, in step S2009, "1000" is set as the waiting time for opening (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. To do. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 41) is activated. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 seconds. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

In addition, in the case of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whichever kind of game result triggered that, the waiting time for opening is set in step S2009. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening/closing execution mode is the same regardless of the type of the game result that triggered it. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for the opening is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized by the player as the same, for example, a low accuracy result or the most advantageous result. When a part of the game result is triggered as described above, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where another game result is triggered.

After executing the processing of step S2009, in step S2010, after setting the opening command, the game state transition processing is ended. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time. Further, the opening command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The processing performed by the voice emission control device 72 upon receiving the opening command will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2001 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, a special winning opening/closing process is executed. The special winning opening opening/closing processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether either the first special winning opening 236a or the second special winning opening 237a is open. If none of the special winning openings 236a and 237a are open, it is determined in step S2102 whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" and the value of the round counter RC is "0". At the same time, it is determined in step S2103 whether the value of the timer counter T is "0".

When both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. When the value of the opening/closing counter SOC or the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter T is "0", the special winning opening opening process is executed in step S2104. The special winning opening opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode being executed this time is a special disengagement result. If it is the special miss result, in step S2202, the situation in which the present special winning opening opening process is activated corresponds to the game result triggered by the above is the special miss result and the first opening. It is determined whether or not there is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, in step S2203, the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 is set to "8" as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the opening/closing number defining mode. set. When a negative determination is made in step S2202 or after step S2203, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S2204. As described above, the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 41) is started in the cycle of 2 msec, so that 0.17 sec is set in step S2204. means.

When a negative determination is made in step S2201, the winning counter PC is set to "8" as the upper limit number which is one ending condition of the round game in step S2205. In a succeeding step S2206, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the shift of the opening/closing execution mode being executed this time is a small round high accuracy result. If the result is a small round high-accuracy result, "85" is set to the timer counter T in step S2204.

When a negative determination is made in step S2206, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode being executed this time is a low certainty result or a most advantageous result. .. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2207, then in step S2208, the situation in which the present special winning opening opening process has been started is the low-probability result or the most advantageous result, and the game result triggered by the above is 1R. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the eyes. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2208, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S2204, and if a negative decision is made in step S2208, the timer counter T is set to "8" in step S2209. 15000" is set. As described above, the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 41) is activated in the 2 msec cycle, so that 30 sec is set in step S2209. ..

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2207, that is, when the game result that triggered the switching of the open/close execution mode being executed this time is an implicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result or an explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result. Advances to step S2210. In step S2210, the situation in which the special winning opening opening process is activated this time corresponds to the first R or the second R while the game result triggered by the above is the implicit branch compatible high-accuracy result or the explicit branch compatible high-accuracy result. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2210, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S2204. If a negative decision is made in step S2210, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S2209. 15000" is set.

After the processing of step S2204 or step S2209 is executed, in step S2211, the situation in which the special winning opening opening processing of this time is started is the game result triggered by the above-mentioned special deviation result and the second opening. It is determined whether it corresponds to the second round, or whether the game result triggered by the above is a small round high-precision result and also corresponds to the second round. In addition, in step S2212, the situation in which the special winning opening opening process is activated this time is the low-probability game result triggered by the above-mentioned result, the high-precision result corresponding to the implicit branch, the high-precision result corresponding to the explicit branch, or the most advantageous result. Whichever of the above, and corresponds to the second R.

When a negative determination is made in both step S2211 and step S2212, in step S2213, the opening execution processing of the first special winning opening 236a is executed. In the opening execution process, the first variable winning drive unit 236c is driven and controlled so that the first special winning opening 236a is in the opened state. After that, the main winning opening opening process is ended. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in at least one of step S2211 and step S2212, in step S2214, the opening execution process for the second special winning opening 237a is executed. In the opening execution processing, the second variable winning a prize driving section 237c is drive-controlled so that the second special winning opening 237a is in an open state. After that, the main winning opening opening process is ended.

That is, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times in the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, in each opening, either the first big winning opening 236a of the first variable winning device 236 or the second big winning opening 237a of the second variable winning device 237 is to be opened. Specifically, the second special winning opening 237a is an opening target only when the opening is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the first special winning opening 236a is an opening target in other opening times.

In addition, the first opening mode of the first special winning opening 236a or the second special winning opening 237a is different from the upper opening time (upper opening period) from the opening of the special winning openings 236a, 237a to the closing. Therefore, multiple types are set. Specifically, a long time mode (long time mode) in which the upper limit opening time is set to 30 sec, which is a long time, and a short time period in which the upper limit opening time is set to 0.17 sec, which is a shorter time than the above long time. The mode (short-term mode) is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the firing handle 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. To be done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to eight. Then, in the long mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the upper limit open time, which is longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, is set. Therefore, when the first variable winning device 236 or the second variable winning device 237 is opened once in a long time mode, once with respect to the special winning opening 236a, 237a which is the opening target. It is expected that a maximum number of prizes will be won in the round game.

On the other hand, in the short time mode, a time shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, an upper limit opening time of a time shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball is set. ing. Therefore, when the first variable winning device 236 or the second variable winning device 237 is opened once in a short time, the winning probability to the big winning opening 236a, 237a which is the opening target is low. It becomes possible to suppress. By the way, when the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 236a, 237a opened in the short time mode occurs, the game ball around the large winning opening 236a, 237a which is the target of the opening in the short time mode. This is a case where the opening operation is started in the short time mode in the situation where the shooting operation is performed so that the player arrives, and even if a winning occurs, it is about one game ball.

Returning to the explanation of the special winning opening/closing processing (FIG. 46), after executing the special winning opening opening processing in step S2104, the opening command is set in step S2105, and then the main winning opening/closing processing is ended. The opening command set in step S2105 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound emission control device 72 starts opening one of the special winning openings 236a and 237a. Is recognized.

On the other hand, in step S2101, when it is determined that either the first special winning opening 236a or the second special winning opening 237a is open, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T is "0" to determine whether or not the upper limit opening time has elapsed for opening the current special winning openings 236a and 237a. When the timer counter T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2107.

In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a side of the first big winning opening 236a or the second big winning opening 237a which is currently open. This determination is performed based on the detection result of the variable winning detection sensor 236e for the first special winning opening 236a, and based on the detection result of the continuous winning detection sensor 237e for the second special winning opening 237a. If no winning has occurred, the main winning opening opening/closing processing is ended as it is.

If a winning has occurred, the numerical information of the winning counter PC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S2108. In a succeeding step S2109, it is determined whether or not this time is the second round of the round number defining mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "14".

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2109, the continuation flag is set in step S2110 if the continuation flag is not set in the RAM 94, and if the continuation flag has already been set, that state is maintained. To do. Here, as already described, the second special winning opening 237a is an opening target in the second round of the round number defining mode. Therefore, the continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 92 to specify that the winning of the second special winning opening 237a has occurred in the second round of the round number defining mode set to 15R.

After executing the process of step S2110, a continuation corresponding command is set in step S2111. However, when the continuation correspondence command has already been transmitted in the same opening/closing execution mode, the continuation correspondence command is not transmitted. The continuation support command set in step S2111 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The process performed by the voice emission control device 72 when the continuation support command is received will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S2109 or after the processing of step S2111 is executed, it is determined in step S2112 whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". When the winning counter PC is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. If the winning counter PC is "0", a closing execution process is executed in step S2113. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the corresponding variable winning award driving units 236c, 237c is finished so that the currently open large winning a prize ports 236a, 237a are closed. In the following step S2114, a closing command is set. The closing command set here is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice emission control device 72 recognizes that the special winning openings 236a and 237a are closed. ..

In a succeeding step S2115, it is determined whether or not the game result which triggered the shift of the opening/closing execution mode being executed this time is a special out-of-match result. If it is not the special deviation result, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S2116, and then in step S2117, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. .. If the round counter RC is not "0", the timer counter T is set to "500" in step S2118, and then the main winning opening/closing processing is ended.

As for the numerical value information set in step S2118, either the first variable winning device 236 or the second variable winning device 237 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, one of the variable winning devices 236 and 237 is opened again. It is numerical information for the release waiting time until the state is reached, and is set to 1 sec in this embodiment. In this case, the numerical information for the open waiting time is the same regardless of the type of the open/close execution mode and the progress of the open/close execution mode.

If it is determined in step S2115 that the game result that triggered the above transition is the special miss result, or if it is determined in step S2117 that the round counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S2119, the timer counter T is set to "2000" as the ending waiting time (waiting period). That is, in this embodiment, the waiting time for ending is 4 seconds. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is ended, the waiting time for ending is set in step S2119 regardless of the type of the game result that triggered it. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is the same in any of the open/close execution modes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for ending is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized by the player as similar, for example, a low accuracy result or the most advantageous result. When a part of the game result is triggered as described above, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where another game result is triggered.

After executing the process of step S2119, the ending command is set in step S2120, and then the main winning opening/closing process is ended. The ending command set in step S2120 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice emission control device 72 recognizes that the opening/closing execution mode is ended. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2106 that the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S2121. In step S2121, a closing execution process is executed. The content of the closing execution process is the same as in step S2114 described above.

In the following step S2122, the opening times of the special winning openings 236a and 237a that have been subjected to the closing execution processing in the immediately preceding step S2121 correspond to the second round of the round number defining mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "14".

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2122, it is decided in step S2123 whether or not the continuation flag is set in the RAM 94. If the continuation flag is not set, in step S2124, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated to "0", and after executing the processing of step S2119 and step S2120 already described, the main winning opening The opening/closing process ends. In other words, in the round number defining mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R, the second special winning opening 237a is opened at the 2R, but the game to the second special winning opening 237a is performed at the 2R. If no winning of the ball has occurred, the opening/closing execution mode is ended without proceeding to the 3rd round.

If a negative determination is made in step S2122 or an affirmative determination is made in step S2123, a closing command is set in step S2125. The processing contents when the closing command is set are similar to those in step S2115.

In a succeeding step S2126, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the shift of the opening/closing execution mode being executed this time is a special out-of-match result. If it is not a special miss result, that is, if the game result that has triggered the above is any jackpot result, in step S2127, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted. In a succeeding step S2128, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. When the round counter RC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2118, and when the round counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S2119. The processing after step S2118 and the processing after step S2119 are as already described.

If it is determined in step S2126 that the game result that was the trigger is the special deviation result, the numerical information of the opening/closing counter SOC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S2129. In a succeeding step S2130, it is determined whether or not the open/close counter SOC is "0". If the open/close counter SOC is not "0", the flow proceeds to step S2118, and if the open/close counter SOC is "0", the flow proceeds to step S2119. The processing after step S2118 and the processing after step S2119 are as already described.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 45), after executing the special winning opening opening/closing processing in step S2011, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, it is determined whether both the round counter RC and the open/close counter SOC are “0”. If either one is not "0", the main game state transition processing is ended as it is. If both are "0", it is determined in step S2013 whether the timer counter T is "0". When the timer counter T is not "0", the game state transition processing is ended as it is. When the timer counter T is "0", in step S2014, after executing the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated.

The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the switching of the opening/closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous result or the high-precision result corresponding to the explicit branch. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2301, in step S2302, if the high-frequency support flag has not been set in the RAM 94, that flag is set, and if it has already been set, that state is maintained. .. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

In a succeeding step S2303, if the number-of-times limitation flag is set in the RAM 94, the number-of-times limitation flag is cleared. When the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the jackpot winning result.

In subsequent step S2304, if the high-probability mode flag is not set in RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the winning/winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Moreover, this high-probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the jackpot winning result. Then, this migration process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, in step S2305, is the game result that triggered the switching of the open/close execution mode executed this time a small round high-precision result or an implicit branch compatible high-precision result? Determine whether or not. When a positive determination is made in step S2305, it is determined in step S2306 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94.

If the high-frequency support flag is set, the process of steps S2303 and S2304 already described is executed, and then the present migration process ends. If the high-frequency support flag is not set, in step S2307, if the high-probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, that state is maintained. To do. As a result, the winning/winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Moreover, this high-probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the jackpot winning result. Then, this migration process is completed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2305, it is determined in step S2308 whether or not the game result that triggered the switching of the open/close execution mode executed this time is a low certainty result. When a negative determination is made in step S2308, this transition processing is ended as it is.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2308, then in step S2309 the high-probability mode flag is cleared if it has been set in the RAM 94. Thereby, the winning/winning lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. Further, this low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the most advantageous result or one of the highly accurate results.

In a succeeding step S2310, if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, in step S2311, the game number counter provided in each counter area 94b of the RAM 94 is set to "100", and in step S2312, if the number-of-times limitation flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set. Set, and maintain that state if already set. As a result, the high-frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times, which is the end reference number, and when 100 game times are exhausted, both the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared. And shift to the low frequency support mode. By the way, although the detailed description is omitted, the process is executed in the electric power combination support process of step S205 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Then, this migration process is completed. At the end of the shift process, the flag corresponding to the game result information set in the RAM 94 is cleared.

As described above, when the game result of the game time is the most advantageous result or the high-precision result corresponding to the explicit branch, regardless of the state at the time when the game time is performed, the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation) After the end of the (mode), the game state is switched to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next big hit result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening/closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 251.

In addition, if the game result of the game round is a small round high-precision result or a high-precision result corresponding to an implicit branch, if the state at the time of the game time is the high-frequency support mode, opening and closing After the execution mode (that is, the number-of-rounds defining mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes a big hit result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening/closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 251.

On the other hand, when the state at the time the game is played is the low frequency support mode, after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode), the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are the games. Transition to the state. These high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are continued at least until the next game result of the game times is the big hit result. By the way, in this case, after the opening/closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating the high probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 251.

In addition, when the game result of the game time is a low probability result, regardless of the state at the time when the game time is performed, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode) ends, the low probability mode Then, the game state shifts to the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low-probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times is the next big hit result, and the high frequency support mode is 100 times of the game times are exhausted without the game result of the game times being the big hit result. In case of low frequency support mode.

Further, when the game result of the game times is one of the deviation results, the shift of the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

<Regarding effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 72>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 102 in the sound emission control device 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. The effect determination process is activated by the MPU 102 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the game result of the game time started this time is the most advantageous result or the inaccurate result based on the content of the type command. If it is the most advantageous result or the low certainty result, in step S2403, a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the big hit result is executed. In the symbol determination process, in the case of the most advantageous result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of odd symbols is established on the one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. .. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. If the result is a low accuracy result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of the even symbols is established on the one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of even symbols and the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the result is neither the most advantageous result nor the low probability result, in step S2404, the game result of the game time started this time is the most advantageous result or low based on the content of the type command. Judge whether it is a jackpot result or a special outlier result other than the certainty result. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2404, common symbol determination processing is executed in step S2405. In the symbol determination processing, a combination of predetermined common symbols on one effective line L1 to L5 (specifically, while preventing the same symbol combination from being established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (specifically, Determines the information corresponding to the stop result that "3.4.1") holds as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the common combination of symbols is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like, but may be predetermined as a specific effective line.

When a negative determination is made in step S2404, a symbol determination process for normal deviation is executed in step S2406. In the symbol determination process, based on the content of the variation command, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to the occurrence of the out-reach display, and if it is a game time related to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, one effective The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established on the lines L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of out-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the stop result in which the common symbol combination is not stopped and displayed is determined.

In addition, in the case of a game time related to the occurrence of the out-reach display, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the outreach symbols is not stopped and displayed is determined as the information of the current stop result.

After performing the process of step S2403, step S2405, or step S2406, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, processing for determining the effect pattern of this game time is executed. In this case, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, the effect duration (effect duration) corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is selected and the effect content is selected. Select. In addition, a lottery on whether or not to display a notice is also performed. In the MPU 102, according to the effect pattern determined in step S2407, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 in the current game time is performed, and the output control of the speaker unit 59 is performed.

In subsequent step S2408, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S2403, step S2405, or step S2406 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S2407 are transmitted to display control device 111. In the MPU 113 of the display control device 111, based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the data table for performing the effect for the current game time on the symbol display device 251 is read from the program ROM 114, and according to the data table. The drawing list is output to the VDP 116 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 251, the effect for game play is executed in accordance with the effect pattern determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72, and the stop result determined by the MPU 102 is finally stopped and displayed. It

When a negative determination is made in step S2401 or after the processing of step S2408 is executed, it is determined in step S2409 whether an opening command has been received. When the opening command is received, in step S2410, the type of the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is specified based on the information included in the opening command.

In a succeeding step S2411, the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the game result identified in the step S2410 is executed. In this case, when the type of the game result identified in step S2410 is the special miss result or the small round high-accuracy result, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. If the specified game result type is a non-explicit branch compatible high-accuracy result or an explicit branch compatible high-accuracy result, the effects A and B are selected as effects for the opening/closing execution mode, and the initial execution is performed. The effect A is set as the target. When the type of the specified game result is the most advantageous result, the effect C is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. If the specified game result type is a low probability result, the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

By the way, the effect A in the present embodiment corresponds to the time when the special winning openings 236a and 237a are opened and closed twice in the opening/closing execution mode, and the effect B in the present embodiment is the opening/closing execution mode. Corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the special winning openings 236a and 237a is executed 13 times in a long time mode, and the effects C and D in the present embodiment are the opening and closing of the special winning openings 236a and 237a in the opening and closing execution mode. Corresponds to the time when is executed 15 times in a long time mode.

In the MPU 102, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 in the current open/close execution mode is performed and the output of the speaker unit 59 is output according to the effect pattern determined in step S2411, except when the process of step S2414 described later is executed. Execute control.

In the following step S2412, the open/close execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of step S2411 is transmitted to the display control device 111. In the MPU 113 of the display control device 111, based on the received command for opening/closing execution mode, a data table for performing the effect for this opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 251 is read from the program ROM 114, and according to the data table. The drawing list is output to the VDP 116 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). As a result, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72.

Here, as described above, the second special winning opening 237a is opened in the second opening in any opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, in the display control device 111, when the effect A, the effect C, or the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the second special winning opening 237a is opened in the second R from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. The display control of the symbol display device 251 is performed so that the image corresponding to the fact that the player should aim for the game ball to reach the second special winning opening 237a before the second or the second round is started. By the way, the notification is canceled at least by the timing when the second round ends or a predetermined timing after that.

When a negative determination is made in step S2409 or after the processing of step S2412 is executed, it is determined in step S2413 whether or not the continuation support command is received. As described above, the continuation corresponding command is transmitted when the winning in the second special winning opening 237a occurs in the second round of the round number defining mode set to 15R.

When the continuation correspondence command is received, the continuation correspondence effect determination process is executed in step S2414. In the MPU 102, the light emission control of the display lamp section 58 is performed so that the light effect corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is executed immediately after the winning in the second special winning opening 237a is generated, and the MPU 102 responds to the occurrence of the winning. The output control of the speaker unit 59 is executed so that the sound is output.

Further, if the game result that triggered the switching of the open/close execution mode being executed this time is a non-explicit branch corresponding high-accuracy result or an explicit branch corresponding high-accuracy result, in step S2414, after the end of the second round. The effect for the opening/closing execution mode is changed from effect A to effect B. In the MPU 102, when the effect A is changed to the effect B, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 after the second end of the opening/closing execution mode of this time is executed according to the effect pattern of the effect B, and the speaker is performed. The output control of the unit 59 is executed.

In a succeeding step S2415, a continuation correspondence effect command is transmitted to the display control device 111. The MPU 113 of the display control device 111 controls the display of the symbol display device 251 so that the effect corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is performed immediately after the winning of the second special winning opening 237a. Further, if the game result that triggered the switching of the open/close execution mode being executed this time is a non-explicit branch compatible high-accuracy result or an explicit branch compatible high-accuracy result, for the open/close execution mode after the end of the 2R In order to execute the effect on the symbol display device 251, a data table for effect B is set.

When a negative determination is made in step S2413 or after the processing of step S2415 is executed, other processing is executed in step S2416. In the other processing, for example, processing for advancing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed based on the reception of the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command. After that, the main effect determination process ends.

<About the content of the game result>
Next, the contents of various game results defined by executing the above various processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

As shown in FIG. 50, the game results set in the embodiment other than the normal miss result are the special miss result, the small round high accuracy result, the implicit branch compatible high accuracy result, the explicit branch compatible high accuracy result, and the maximum result. Advantageous results and low accuracy results.

Of these game results, the special miss result is the game result that is selected when the win or failure is not won, and various jackpot results other than the special miss result are the games that are selected when the win or win is won. The result. Further, the various jackpot results are different from the deviation result, and are the game results which are the triggers for the transition in either one of the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode, but the transition modes are different as shown in FIG.

In addition, although each game result listed in FIG. 50 serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the contents of the opening/closing execution mode of the shifting destination are different in a predetermined combination and individually. The contents of each of the open/close execution modes will be described below.

In the most advantageous result and the low accuracy result, the game moves to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and in the 1st R, the first big winning opening 236a is opened and closed once in a short time mode, and the 2R The eye opens and closes the second special winning opening 237a once, and each of the 3R to 15R eyes opens and closes the first special winning opening 236a once. In the following description, the open/close execution mode is also referred to as the pattern A open/close execution mode in the present embodiment.

Here, the first big winning opening 236a is a winning portion for continuation confirmation, and even if no winning of the game ball occurs during opening, the next round game will be continued except for the 15th round, The second big winning opening 237a is a winning portion for continuous branching, and if no winning of a game ball occurs during opening, the next round game is not continued. In this case, the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 237a is performed on the 2nd R, but the opening mode is a long time mode. Then, if a shooting operation is performed aiming at winning at the second special winning opening 237a, winning at the second special winning opening 237a occurs, and opening and closing of the first big winning opening 236a after the third round. ..

By the way, the combination of odd symbols is stopped and displayed at the game time that is the most advantageous result, and the effect C is executed as the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the combination of even symbols is stopped at the game time when the result is low. While being displayed, the effect D is executed as an effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, the player can recognize whether the game result that triggered the transition is the most advantageous result or the low certainty result.

As a result of the special deviation, the mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and the special winning openings 236a and 237a are opened/closed twice in a short time mode. In this case, the first big winning opening 236a is opened at the first opening, and the second big winning opening 237a is opened at the second opening. In addition, in the small round high accuracy result, the mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with the upper limit number of times being two, and the big winning openings 236a and 237a are opened and closed twice in a short time mode. In this case, the first big winning opening 236a is opened at the 1R, and the second big winning opening 237a is opened at the 2R.

That is, when comparing the special miss result and the small round high accuracy result, the former is in the opening/closing number defining mode, while the latter is in the round number defining mode, but the big winning opening 236a, The state in which the 237a is opened and closed is common. In addition, in both the game times that result in a special disengagement result and the game times that result in a high accuracy with a small number of rounds, a common combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 251, and the effect in the opening/closing execution mode is also produced A Have in common. Furthermore, the support mode is maintained in the support mode up to that time in both the special out-of-range result and the small round high-accuracy result. Therefore, when the game result is a special miss result or a small round high-accuracy result, the player predicts whether the winning/winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode or whether the winning/winning lottery mode is not switched. You can play while playing.

In the following description, the opening/closing execution mode executed in the case of the special deviation result and the small round high-accuracy result is also referred to as the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B in the present embodiment.

In the non-explicit branch correspondence high-accuracy result and the explicit branch correspondence high-accuracy result, it is a round number defining mode in which a round game is performed with an upper limit number of 15 times, and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C in the present embodiment. Here, the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C is common to the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B in the opening mode of the variable winning devices 236 and 237 up to the second round, and is variable with the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B depending on the progress situation. The appearance of the winning devices 236 and 237 is similar to the appearance. The opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 51 in addition to FIG.

FIG. 51(a) shows the opened state of the first special winning opening 236a, FIG. 51(b) shows the opened state of the second special winning opening 237a, and FIG. 51(c) shows the second special winning opening 237a. Indicates whether or not there is a prize. 51A and 51B show the state of the pattern C opening/closing execution mode in the present embodiment, and FIG. 51C shows the state of the pattern B opening/closing execution mode in the present embodiment. There is.

As shown in FIG. 51(A), the first special winning opening 236a is opened once by the 1R eye in the short time mode, and the second special winning opening 237a is opened by the short time manner in the 2R eye. It is done once. As shown in FIG. 51(C), the opening manners of the 1R and 2R are common to the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B. Further, in both of the game times that are the non-explicit branch corresponding high-accuracy result and the game times that are the explicit branch corresponding high-accuracy result, a combination of common symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 251, and the common symbol is also displayed. The combination of is common to the game times that result in a special miss and the game times that result in a high accuracy with a small number of rounds. Furthermore, in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern C, the effect until the end of the 2R is the effect A, which is common to the case of the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B.

With the above structure, the player opens the first special winning opening 236a once in the short time mode from the start of the opening/closing execution mode and once opens the second special winning opening 237a in the short time mode. At the timing when it is performed, it is not possible to judge from the modes of the variable winning devices 236, 237 and the pattern display device 251 whether the opening/closing execution mode currently being executed is the pattern B or the pattern C. Similarly, at the above timing, from the aspect of the variable winning devices 236, 237 and the pattern display device 251, the game result that triggered the transition of the opening/closing execution mode is a special miss result, a small round high accuracy result, and an implicit branch. It is not possible to determine whether the result is a high-accuracy response result or a high-accuracy explicit response result. Therefore, the player digests the open/close execution mode while predicting which game result at least until the above timing.

Further, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, as shown in FIG. 50, the first special winning opening 236a is opened at the 1R and 3R to 15R and the second special winning opening 237a is opened at the 2R. To be done. In this case, the first big winning opening 236a is a winning part for continuation confirmation, and the next round game will be continued except for the 15th round even if the game ball does not win during the opening. The second big winning opening 237a is a winning portion for continuous branching, and if no winning of a game ball occurs during opening, the next round game is not continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51(A), when the second prize hole 237a is won at the 2R, the first prize hole 236a is opened for a long time after the 3R. However, as shown in FIG. 51(B), when the second special winning opening 237a is not won at the 2R, the opening of the first special winning opening 236a at the 3R to 15R is not executed. ..

As shown in FIG. 51(B), when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C ends at the 2R, the opening mode of the special winning openings 236a, 237a from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is as shown in FIG. The open/close execution mode of the pattern B shown in 51(C) is the same as or apparently the same. In this case, the support mode is maintained in the previous support mode for the high-precision results that support implicit branch, and the high-frequency support mode is set for the high-precision results that support explicit branch if the previous support mode is the low-frequency support mode. If the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode until then, it is maintained. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, if the game result is a special miss result, a small round high-precision result, a non-explicit branch compatible high-accuracy result, or an explicit branch compatible high-accuracy result, even after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, The player can play the game while predicting whether the winning/winning lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode or whether the transition to the winning/winning lottery mode will not occur. In addition, if the game result in the low frequency support mode is a special miss result, a small round high accuracy result or a high accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, even after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the player is in the win/loss lottery mode. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether the high probability mode is set or whether the transition to the win/win lottery mode does not occur.

On the other hand, as described above, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, when the second big winning opening 237a is won, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the first big winning opening after the 3rd winning The opening of 236a according to the long time mode is performed. In other words, the profit obtained by the player is greatly different depending on whether or not the second big winning opening 237a has won in the second opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C. Then, the player expects to win the second big winning opening 237a when the combination of the common symbols is stopped and displayed at the end of the game and the opening/closing execution mode accompanied by the execution of the effect A is started. While it is thought that the game ball is operated to shoot. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51C, even if a game ball is won into the second special winning opening 237a in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern B, the opening/closing execution mode concerned closes the second special winning opening 237a. Will be ended later. Then, when the game ball is won into the second special winning opening 237a and the opening of the first special winning opening 236a is continuously executed, it is determined that the player is in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C. Can be recognized. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C is executed, the subsequent winning/winning lottery mode is always the high-probability mode. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, when the winning of the game ball to the second special winning opening 237a occurs, the opening of the first special winning opening 236a after the third round is executed as described above. Not only the benefit, but also the benefit that it is possible to clearly recognize that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode after execution of the opening/closing execution mode is given.

By the way, in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, the first variable which is a non-branch-compatible variable ball entrance means, not the second variable winning device 237 which is a branch-compatible variable ball entrance means at the 1Rth and 3R-15R eyes. When the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C is executed by opening the prize winning device 236, at least up to the 2Rth is surely continued, and when the winning to the second variable prize winning device 237 occurs at the 2ndR. Will surely continue until the 15th round. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C is entered, the variable prize winning devices 236 and 237 are surely opened a plurality of times, so that the opening/closing execution mode can be reliably continued for a certain period of time. It is possible to make the degree of profit of generating a prize in the second variable winning device 237 visually noticeable. Furthermore, the second variable winning a prize device 237 can be opened only for one round game, so that the timing for branching the progress of the opening/closing execution mode is aggregated, and the branch is performed in each round game. Compared with the configuration, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while suppressing the loss of the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the opening/closing execution mode.

When the second variable winning device 237 is opened by providing the first variable winning device 236 as the non-branchable variable winning device and the second variable winning device 237 as the branching variable winning device. Paying attention to the fact that a prize is given to the second variable winning device 237, the player plays a game, and when the first variable winning device 236 is opened, the player is given to the first variable winning device 236. Although the degree of attention to the generation of the winnings is slightly lowered, the player can use the open/close execution mode without anxiety. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the case of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode while maintaining the satisfaction of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, instead of switching the role of one variable winning device between a branch corresponding role and a non-branch corresponding role, there is a branch corresponding role and a non-branch corresponding role for each hardware configuration of the variable prize device. Are distinguished. As a result, the player can clearly understand whether it is time to pay attention to the occurrence of a prize in the variable winning devices 236 and 237, or whether it is time to digest the opening/closing execution mode without anxiety. ..

In the common section common to both the pattern B opening/closing execution mode and the pattern C opening/closing execution mode, the object to be opened is switched between the first variable winning device 236 and the second variable winning device 237. The pattern of switching is common to the pattern B and the pattern C. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing execution mode currently being executed in the common section from being pattern B or pattern C, while preventing the game in the common section from becoming monotonous.

<Another form of the second embodiment>
(1) The timing of opening the second variable winning device 237 is not limited to the second opening, and may be the first opening as long as it is not the last opening. It may be. However, in order to enhance the advantage that the subsequent opening is executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the second variable winning device 237, the second variable winning device is opened at a timing before the intermediate opening of the opening/closing execution mode. It is preferable that 237 be an opening target.

(2) At the first opening in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, the opening may be performed in a mode for a long time or in a mode in which the upper limit number of round games can be won. In this configuration, when the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C is entered, the opening is performed at least once in a long time mode, so that the player's satisfaction of entering the opening/closing execution mode disappears. It can be suppressed.

(3) In the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, a common section for disabling the distinction from the pattern B is set for the first and second Rs, but all opening operations performed in the common section are performed multiple times. It may be executed by the second variable winning device 237. In this case, in the common section, even if the second variable winning device 237 does not win in the opening cycle executed first, the subsequent opening cycle is always executed, and in the common section. A configuration may be adopted in which, if a prize is awarded to the second variable winning device 237 at any of the opening times performed, a new opening is performed after the common section. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure a long period of time expected to occur when a prize is won in the second variable winning device 237.

(4) In the pattern C opening/closing execution mode, the second variable winning device 237 may be opened and closed a plurality of times in the round game in which the second variable winning device 237 is to be opened. In this case, if a prize is awarded to the second variable winning device 237 at any one of the opening times of the round game, the subsequent round game may be executed.

(5) When the second variable winning device 237 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode of the pattern C, the opening mode may be selected by lottery from a plurality of types. As the plurality of types of modes, only the long time mode and the short time mode may be set, or a mode other than these may be set.

(6) In the opening/closing execution mode of pattern C, a special operation that does not occur in the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B is generated based on the fact that the second variable winning device 237 is won in the second opening in the common section. By doing so, when focusing on the effect that the player's attention to the game in each opening/closing execution mode can be improved, the special operation may not be a new opening thereafter. For example, as a special operation, a special effect may be performed by a display device such as the display lamp unit 58, the speaker unit 59, or the symbol display device 251. In addition, in such a configuration in which the special action is performed by the special effect, a single variable winning device may be provided instead of a plurality of variable winning devices provided in the game area.

(7) Instead of a configuration in which a combination of common symbols is always stopped and displayed in the game times when switching to the opening/closing execution mode of pattern B and pattern C, whichever stop result is randomly selected It may be configured such that it is difficult to grasp whether the open/close execution mode is triggered by the game result.

(8) A configuration in which one of a plurality of types of effects is executed instead of the configuration in which the same effect for the same opening/closing execution mode is always executed at the start of the pattern B opening/closing execution mode or the pattern C opening/closing execution mode May be In this case, the plurality of types of effects may be completely randomly executed, and the selection rate of each effect may be different depending on the game result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode.

(9) The combination of the pattern of each open/close execution mode and the pattern of the setting mode of the game state after the execution of the open/close execution mode is not limited to that in the above-described embodiment, and is arbitrary.

(10) The jackpot type counter C2 may be omitted, and all game results may be distributed using the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, instead of using the jackpot random number counter C1 to randomly select the occurrence or non-occurrence of the special deviation result, a counter dedicated to the special deviation result is separately provided to determine whether or not the special deviation result is generated using the counter. It may be configured. Further, in the high-probability mode as compared with the low-probability mode, instead of the configuration having a low probability of having a special deviation result, the probability of a special deviation result may be the same or substantially the same in both modes. May have a higher probability of having a special outlier result, or may have a configuration in which the special outlier result does not occur in the high probability mode.

(11) The advantage of the game state set after the opening/closing execution mode is defined by the winning/winning lottery mode and the support mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A relatively advantageous state and a disadvantageous state may be set depending on the difference in the number of games in which the high frequency support mode is continued in the object 239a. Further, a relatively advantageous state and a disadvantageous state may be set depending on the difference in the number of games in which the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode is continued. Further, a relatively advantageous state and a disadvantageous state may be set depending on whether or not the electric accessory 239a enters the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode.

(12) The hold information related to winning in the upper operation port 238 and the hold information related to winning in the lower operation port 239 may be stored separately. In addition, the hold information related to the winning on the lower working opening 239 is not preferentially consumed, and is either the hold information related to the winning on the upper working opening 238 or the hold information related to the winning on the lower working opening 239. Even if there is, it may be configured to be digested in the order of acquisition.

(13) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 111 is controlled by the sound emission control device 72 based on the command output from the main control device 71, the display control is performed based on the command output from the main control device 71. The device 111 may control the audio emission control device 72. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 71, and both functions of the both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 71. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the audio emission control device 72 and the configuration of the command output from the audio emission control device 72 to the display control device 111 are arbitrary.

(14) The device for executing the game use effect is not limited to the symbol display device 251, and the game use effect is executed by the movable decorative member operating. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a game light effect is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a game time effect may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above aspects. Good.

(15) In the main control device 71, one game time is started based on the fact that the main control device 71 determines whether or not the winning/non-winning judgment has been made. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the conditions for the win/fail judgment are satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the win/fail judgment is actually made, and after that the win/fail judgment is made based on the fact that the win/fail judgment is made. The display mode, display duration, and stop result may be determined. In this case, in the main control device 71, when it is the start timing of the game time, first, the variation command is transmitted, and after that, when the winning/failing determination, the determination of the display duration time and the type determination are performed, the time command and the type The configuration may be such that commands are transmitted, or the transmission timings of these time commands and type commands may be shifted.

(16) Although the main display unit 243 is configured to display the stop result corresponding to each game result, instead of this, the main display unit 243 may not be provided, and any game result may be displayed. A common stop result may be displayed on the display unit 243, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the main display unit 243, so that any game result is displayed from the display of the main display unit 243. It may be configured such that it cannot be identified.

(17) In the display screen G, the game result is specified separately from the symbols (specifically, the symbols scroll-displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3) that are variably displayed for performing the game diversion effect. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a design (design) for displaying is displayed. For example, on the display screen G, a clarification area corresponding to at least one of a narrower area and an edge area than the area in which the effect design is displayed is displayed, and at the time of ending the game in this clarification area. It may be configured such that a display corresponding to the game result is made. In this case, the display may be performed by a pattern of a lighting color in one divisional portion or a plurality of divisional portions, or may be performed by a pattern of characters or patterns that are difficult to identify.

In addition, the display contents may be hard to be recognized by anyone other than those who are familiar with the correspondence relationship between the display contents and the game results because the display contents are similar between the game results. In this case, the game hall manager or the like can grasp the game result through the display while making it difficult for the player to grasp the game result through the display. Further, in the above-mentioned clarification area, the variable display or the switching display may be performed while the game time is continuing, and the display is not performed during the game time, but the stop result is displayed when the game time is finished. It may be configured to be.

(18) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The characteristic configuration of the above-described embodiment can be applied to a pachinko machine that gives a big hit when entering, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A variable ball which is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning hole 32a) formed to have a size in which a game ball can enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32),
The variable ball entrance control means for executing the variable ball entrance control to switch the variable ball entrance means to the open state after the variable ball entrance means is set to the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the special winning opening/closing process. Function to execute)
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the game state (function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result (each jackpot result and special off result) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the specific game state (opening and closing) in which the variable ball entry control is performed. Transition means for shifting the game state to the execution mode) (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As a unit mode when the variable ball entrance control means performs the variable ball entrance control once, the expectation of entering the game ball into the variable ball entrance means in the open state is relative. The high-expectancy mode (long-time mode) and the low-expectancy mode (short-time mode) are set so that
Execution mode of at least a part of the section in the predetermined specific game state (for example, the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a special deviation result in the first embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode in the case of an explicit high certainty jackpot result B) ), the process proceeds by performing the variable ball entrance control according to the low-expectation degree mode, and ends and is predetermined when the variable ball entrance control is executed for a predetermined specific reference number of times. A predetermined aspect is set to end even when a specific reference number of game balls enter the opening of the variable ball entering means,
The number of the specific reference number is set to be equal to or less than the number of the specific reference number.

According to the characteristic A1, since the section to be progressed by performing the variable entry control in the low expectation mode during the specific game state is set, the influence on the rate of granting the privilege to the player It is possible to use the variable ball entering means as one of the effects while suppressing the.

In this case, the section ends when the variable ball entry control is executed over the specific reference number of times and also when a specific reference number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means. The number of specific reference numbers is set to be equal to or less than the number of specific reference numbers. As a result, when the above-mentioned section occurs, the player continues to launch the game ball in a mode aiming at the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and at least 1 at each opening of the variable ball entering means. When the entry of the individual game balls occurs, the entry of the specific reference number of the game balls occurs, and the privilege corresponding to the entry is obtained.

In addition, the earlier the game balls enter the variable ball entering means, the smaller the number of times the variable ball entering control is executed during the section. Therefore, it is possible to provide the element of the effect that the number of times of the variable ball entry control changes in association with the mode of launching the game ball.

From the above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific game state.

In addition, as the specific game state, it is configured to have a round game that is controlled to be ended when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches the upper limit number, and the round game is further configured. In a configuration in which a specific game state corresponding to a round game is set, which is ended based on the execution of a predetermined upper limit number of times,
The high-expectancy mode is a mode in which the upper limit number of balls is likely to enter the variable ball entrance means that is the subject of the control while the variable ball entrance control according to the aspect is being executed. On the other hand,
In the low expectation mode, during the period in which the variable ball entrance control according to the mode is being executed, the upper limit number of game balls do not enter the variable ball entrance means that is the control target, or The configuration may be such that it is unlikely to occur.

Further, in order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering the game ball between the low-expectancy mode and the high-expectancy mode, in the low-expectancy mode, the period during which the target of variable entry control is in the open state. May be set to a period shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Further, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of the variable ball entry control is in the open state is a period equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and the firing cycle of the game ball×n (n is greater than the upper limit number It may be configured such that it is set for a period of a small number) or less. Further, in a configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the above n may be a number of "1", "2" or "3".

Feature A2. As the specific game state, it progresses by performing the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode and which particular game state is unidentifiable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the operation of the variable entry means. A first specific game state (for example, an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the implicit high-probability jackpot result A in the first embodiment) in which a low identification section is set, and a second specific game state (for example, special in the first embodiment) The opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of disconnection is set,
The second specific game state is set to include a section executed by the predetermined mode in the low discrimination section,
In the first specific game state, the number of sections executed by the predetermined mode included in the low identification section does not include the section executed by the predetermined mode in the low identification section The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the number is set to be larger than that in the second specific game state.

According to the characteristic A2, the game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low discrimination section where the discrimination is made impossible. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In this case, at least in the low identification section of the second specific game state, it is possible to shorten the section by continuing the firing of the game ball, and through the occurrence of the shortening, the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It is possible to know which side of the gaming state is not being executed. As a result, the player can recognize which side of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is not being executed, depending on the manner in which the game ball enters the variable ball entering means in the low discrimination section. Becomes That is, the player is provided with a well-balanced game of predicting the type of the specific game state and the game of being able to grasp the specific game state on the side not being executed according to the entering mode of the game ball. Besides, it is possible to provide a well-balanced game that enhances the degree of attention only by the difference in the condition of the low discrimination section.

Features A3. As the specific game state, it progresses by performing the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode and which particular game state is unidentifiable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the operation of the variable entry means. A first specific game state (for example, an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the implicit high-probability jackpot result A in the first embodiment) in which a low identification section is set, and a second specific game state (for example, special in the first embodiment) The opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of disconnection is set,
In the second specific game state, when the variable ball entry control is executed over the specific reference number of times, the low identification section ends, and the specific reference number of game balls are the variable ball entry means. It is set to an execution mode in which the low discrimination section ends even when entering the opening,
The first specific game state is set to an execution mode in which the low discrimination section does not end even if the specific reference number of game balls enter the opening of the variable ball entering means. The gaming machine described in A1.

According to the characteristic A3, the game is performed while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low discrimination section in which the discrimination is made impossible. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In this case, in the low identification section in the second specific game state, it is possible to shorten the section by continuing the firing of the game balls and causing the ball of the specific reference number of game balls to enter, while the first specific game is being executed. In the low identification section in the state, even if the shooting of the game ball is continued and the entry of the specific reference number of game balls is generated, the section cannot be shortened. As a result, the player can recognize which side of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is not being executed, depending on the manner in which the game ball enters the variable ball entering means in the low discrimination section. Becomes That is, the player is provided with a well-balanced game of predicting the type of the specific game state and the game of being able to grasp the specific game state on the side not being executed according to the entering mode of the game ball. Besides, it is possible to provide a well-balanced game that enhances the degree of attention only by the difference in the condition of the low discrimination section.

Features A4. The maximum number of times the variable entrance control is executed in the low discrimination section is set to the specific reference number in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state,
Further, the first specific game state is configured to have a round game that is controlled so as to be ended when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches the upper limit number, and the round concerned. The game is set as an execution mode that is ended based on the fact that the game is executed as a plurality of times over a predetermined upper limit number, and is also set as an execution mode in which the round game is included in the low identification section The gaming machine described in the feature A3.

According to the characteristic A4, even if a large number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means in the low identification section in the first specific game state, the variable ball entering control is executed over the number of round games. On the other hand, in the low identification section in the second specific game state, the variable ball entry control is always executed once, but whether or not the variable ball entry control is executed over the number of times is variable ball entry means. Depends on the mode of entering the game ball into. As a result, the relationship between the ball entry mode to the variable ball entry means and the number of times the variable ball entry means is opened can be made different between the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the variable ball entry means is provided. It becomes easier for the player to grasp the type of the specific game state through the entry mode.

Features A5. The first specific game state is set so that the variable ball entry control is executed once in the round game once in the low identification section. Machine.

According to the characteristic A5, the variable ball entrance means is opened for a specific reference number of times in the low identification section of the first specific game state without depending on the entry mode of the game ball, whereas the second identification is performed. In the low discrimination section of the game state, the opening of the variable ball entering means may not be executed for the specific reference number of times. Thereby, when grasping the type of the specific game state according to the mode of entering the variable ball entering means, the player simply confirms the number of balls entering the variable ball entering means and the number of times the variable ball entering means is opened. Therefore, the elements to be noticed in grasping the type of the specific game state are clarified, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

Features A6. Each of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is set to end without the new variable ball entrance control being executed after the low identification section ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5.

According to the characteristic A6, when the low identification section ends normally, it becomes difficult to grasp which type the specific game state is, even after the specific game state ends. Thereby, in such a situation, it is possible to make the player predict which type it was even after the end of the specific game state. On the other hand, the importance of grasping the type of the specific game state is increased in accordance with the entry mode of the game ball in the low discrimination section, and the degree of attention to the game by the grasping is increased.

Features A7. End when the first specific game state is ended and the second specific game state is ended while the aspect of the game state set after the end is made different while making it difficult or difficult to identify in the appearance of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a subsequent transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71).

According to the feature A7, the importance of grasping the type of the specific game state is enhanced according to the entry mode of the game ball in the low discrimination section, and the attention to the game by the grasping is enhanced. ..

It should be noted that a specific ball-in portion (lower working port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter and which can be switched between an open state and a closed state,
Acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific entrance portion (function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Equipped with
The shift determining means determines that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion, and performs the determination based on that condition, and The determination mode has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The reception control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball-entering portion between the open state and the closed state, does not become the open state or has a relatively low chance of becoming the open state per unit time. In the configuration having the switching mode and the high-frequency switching mode in which the opportunity to be in the open state per unit time is relatively high,
The transition means after the end makes the transition determination mode different while the first specific game state is finished and the second specific game state is finished, while the switching mode is the same. Good.

Feature A8. The notification means (symbol display device) so that the predetermined notification is performed when the section performed in the predetermined mode ends due to the specific reference number of game balls entering the opening of the variable ball entering means. 41) for controlling the notification (a function of executing the processing of step S721 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, a function of executing the processing of steps S1017 to S1019 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72).
The notification control means, the number of game balls entering the opening of the variable ball entering means to the specific reference number in the opening times of the variable ball entering means related to the variable ball entering control of the specific reference number of times. When any of the features A1 to A7 is provided, a limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S720 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for limiting the execution of the predetermined notification is provided. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic A8, when the predetermined notification is given by the notification means, when the specific reference number of game balls is finished by entering the variable ball entering means, the player can clearly understand it. Is possible. On the other hand, even if the number of entered balls of the game ball reaches the specified reference number at the opening time of the variable reference means of the specific reference number of times, the predetermined notification is not executed, and thus the mode of entering the game ball into the variable ball input means. It becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the number of times the variable ball entering means is opened.

Feature A9. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A variable ball which is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning hole 32a) formed to have a size in which a game ball can enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32),
The variable ball entrance control means for executing the variable ball entrance control to switch the variable ball entrance means to the open state after the variable ball entrance means is set to the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the special winning opening/closing process. Function to execute)
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the game state (function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result (each jackpot result and special off result) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the specific game state (opening and closing) in which the variable ball entry control is performed. Transition means for shifting the game state to the execution mode) (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the specific game state,
It is configured to have a round game which is controlled to be ended when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches the upper limit number while the variable ball entering control is performed, and the round is further configured. A first specific game state that is ended when the game is executed over a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the implicit high-precision jackpot result A in the first embodiment),
When the variable ball entry control is executed over a predetermined number of predetermined reference times, and when a predetermined number of predetermined reference game balls enter the opening of the variable ball entry means. A second specific game state that also ends (for example, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the special disconnection result in the first embodiment),
Is set,
As a unit mode when the variable ball entrance control means performs the variable ball entrance control once, the expectation of entering the game ball into the variable ball entrance means in the open state is relative. The high-expectancy mode (long-time mode) and the low-expectancy mode (short-time mode) are set so that
The first specific game state and the second specific game state proceed by the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode, and the operation of the variable ball entry means to determine which specific game state. Has a low identification section that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify,
A game machine characterized in that the specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number.

According to the characteristic A9, the game is performed while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low discrimination section where the discrimination is made impossible. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In this case, in the low identification section in the second specific game state, the section can be shortened by continuing the firing of the game balls and causing the ball of the specific reference number of game balls to enter. In particular, since the specific reference number of the second specific game state is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of the round game, the situation as described above can occur. As a result, the player can recognize which side of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is not being executed, depending on the manner in which the game ball enters the variable ball entering means in the low discrimination section. Becomes That is, the player is provided with a well-balanced game of predicting the type of the specific game state and the game of being able to grasp the specific game state on the side not being executed according to the entering mode of the game ball. be able to.

From the above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific game state.

The configuration newly defined in any one of the features A3 to A8 may be applied to the configuration of the feature A9. In this case, the synergistic effect by applying each structure is produced.

Feature A10. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A variable ball which is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning hole 32a) formed to have a size in which a game ball can enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32),
The variable ball entrance control means for executing the variable ball entrance control to switch the variable ball entrance means to the open state after the variable ball entrance means is set to the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the special winning opening/closing process. Function to execute)
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the game state (function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result (each jackpot result and special off result) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the specific game state (opening and closing) in which the variable ball entry control is performed. Transition means for shifting the game state to the execution mode) (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the execution mode of at least a part of the section during the specific game state, the variable ball entry control proceeds as the variable ball entry control is performed, and the variable ball entry control for the reference number of times determined corresponding to the section is executed. When it is done or when the reference period defined corresponding to the section has elapsed, and the reference number of game balls defined corresponding to the section enters the opening of the variable ball entering means. Even if you do, a unit section is set to end,
As the specific game state, a first specific game state (in the first embodiment, a low identification section in which it is difficult or difficult to identify which of the specific game states the operation of the variable ball entering means can be identified For example, an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the implicit high-precision jackpot result A) and a second specific game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode triggered by a special deviation result in the first embodiment) are set,
The number of the unit sections included in the low identification section of the first specific game state and the number of unit sections included in the low identification section of the second specific game state are different. A gaming machine to do.

According to the characteristic A10, the game is performed while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low discrimination section where the discrimination is made impossible. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In this case, the number of unit sections included in the low identification section of the first specific game state and the number of unit sections included in the low identification section of the second specific game state are different, and thus the low identification section When a large number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means, the minimum number of variable ball entrance controls executed in the low discrimination sections of the two are different. As a result, the player grasps which side of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is not being executed, in relation to the manner of entering the variable ball entering means and the number of times the variable ball entering means is opened. It becomes possible. That is, the game in which the type of the specific game state is predicted and the game in which the specific game state on the side that is not likely to be executed can be grasped in accordance with the entering mode of the game ball, in a well-balanced game. Can be provided to the person.

From the above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific game state.

The reference number of times or the reference period may be the same in each unit section, may be different in a predetermined combination or individually, and the reference number may be the same in each unit section, a predetermined combination or individual May be different.

Feature A11. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
An opening that is provided in the game area and has a size that allows a game ball to enter (a big winning opening 32a in the first embodiment, a first winning opening 236a in the second embodiment, and a second winning prize) A variable winning means (variable winning device 32 in the first embodiment, a first variable winning device in the second embodiment) having a mouth 237a) and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state. 236, a second variable winning device 237),
Variable ball control means for executing variable ball control for switching the variable ball means to the closed state after the variable ball means is in the open state (function of executing a special winning opening/closing process in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the game state (a function to execute the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the first embodiment, a main control device in the second embodiment Function of executing the processing of steps S1901 to S1915 in the MPU 92 of 71),
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the game state, the transition means for shifting the game state to the specific game state in which the variable ball entry control is performed (first In the second embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and the function of executing the processes of steps S2004 to S2010 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the second embodiment).
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the specific game state, the first specific game state (in the first embodiment, a low discrimination section in which it is difficult to discriminate or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the operation of the variable ball entering means, which is the specific game state) For example, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result A, in the second embodiment, for example, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the explicit branch correspondence high-accuracy result) and the second specific game state (in the first embodiment). For example, an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special disconnection result, and an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the special disconnection result) are set in the second embodiment.
In the low identification section of one of the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the variable ball entering control is the target of the variable ball entering control, and the ball entering the variable ball entering means is in the open state. On the basis of the occurrence, the special control execution means for executing special control corresponding to making it easier for the player to recognize that the other specific game state is not likely (main controller in the first embodiment 71, the function of executing the processing of steps S505 and S506 in the MPU 92 and the function of making a positive determination in step S712, and the function of executing the processing of steps S2008, S2122, and S2123 in the second embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by being present.

According to the characteristic A11, the game is performed while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low discrimination section where the discrimination is made impossible. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

By continuing the shooting of the game ball in the low discrimination section and causing the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means, whether the first specific game state and the second specific game state are determined through the presence or absence of execution of special control. It becomes possible for the player to grasp which side is not being executed. That is, the game in which the type of the specific game state is predicted and the game in which the specific game state on the side that is not likely to be executed can be grasped in accordance with the entering mode of the game ball, in a well-balanced game. Can be provided to the person.

From the above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific game state.

Feature A12. As the transition determination result, the first transition determination result in which the state of the game state set after the specific game state may be different (in the first embodiment, for example, the implicit high-precision jackpot result, in the second embodiment, For example, an explicit branch correspondence high-accuracy result) and a second transition determination result (for example, a special deviation result in the first embodiment, a special deviation result in the second embodiment) are set,
The transfer means is
Based on the result of the first transition determination result, a transition unit corresponding to the first transition determination that shifts the game state to the first specific game state (in the first embodiment, the step S507 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71). , A function of executing the processing of step S609, step S613, step S614 and step S802. In the second embodiment, a negative determination is made in step S2201, step S2206 and step S2207 in the MPU 92 of the main control unit 71, and the subsequent processing. Function to execute)
Based on the result of the second transition determination result, a transition unit corresponding to the second transition determination that shifts the game state to the second specific game state (in the first embodiment, the step S505 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71). , A function of executing the processing of steps S506 and S802, and a function of executing an affirmative determination in step S901 of the MPU 92 of the main control unit 71 in the second embodiment to execute the subsequent processing).
A gaming machine according to feature A11, which is provided with:

According to the characteristic A12, the importance of grasping the type of the specific game state in accordance with the entry mode of the game ball in the low discrimination section is enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game by the grasping is enhanced.

Features A13. The special control execution means is the target of the variable ball entry control in the low identification section of one of the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and is directed to the variable ball entry means in the open state. On the basis of the occurrence of the entry of the game ball, as the special control, the special operation that is not executed or is relatively unlikely to be executed in the other specific game state is the variable entrance means. Alternatively, the game machine according to the characteristic A11 or A12 is characterized by being executed by a game machine component different from that.

According to the characteristic A13, when grasping the type of the specific game state currently being executed according to the entry mode of the game ball, the player only needs to confirm the presence/absence of a special action, so the grasp is made clear. It becomes possible to do it.

Feature A14. The special control execution means is a target of the variable ball entry control in the low discrimination section in the first specific game state, and the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the open state The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the variable variable ball control is newly performed based on the occurrence.

According to the characteristic A14, even if the first specific game state is executed, if the game ball does not enter the variable ball entering means in the low discrimination section, a new variable ball entrance control is performed thereafter. Is not done. And when it becomes the said situation, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the case of a 2nd specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means that is open in the low discrimination section.

In addition, in the present configuration, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entering means in the low identification section of the first specific game state, the bonus obtained by the player during the first specific game state is different. Will occur. In other words, not only is the player given the advantage of being able to grasp the type of the specific game state according to the ball entry mode of the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the low discrimination section, but after that The profit that the variable ball entry control is executed is given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means which is in the open state in the low discrimination section.

Feature A15. As a unit mode when the variable ball entrance control means performs the variable ball entrance control once, the expectation of entering the game ball into the variable ball entrance means in the open state is relative. The high-expectancy mode and the low-expectancy mode are set so that
The low discrimination section is set such that the unit mode of the variable entrance control executed in the section is the low expectation mode,
Further, the special control execution means is the target of the variable ball entry control in the low identification section in the case of the first specific game state, and the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the open state. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, characterized in that, based on the occurrence of a ball, as the special action, the variable ball entry control according to the high expectation mode is performed thereafter. ..

According to the feature A15, it is possible to provide a low discrimination section while suppressing an excessive increase in the number of balls entering the variable ball entering means during the specific game state. Furthermore, in contrast to the configuration in which the special operation is performed based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the low identification section of the first specific game state, the low expectation mode is used in the low identification section. By executing the variable ball entry control, the player's attention to the ball entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means which is in the open state in the low discrimination section is increased accordingly.

Further, even if the first specific game state is executed, if the game ball does not enter the variable ball entering means in the low discrimination section, then the variable ball entrance control by the high expectation mode is performed. Not done And when it becomes the said situation, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the case of a 2nd specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means that is open in the low discrimination section.

In addition, in the present configuration, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entering means in the low identification section of the first specific game state, the bonus obtained by the player during the first specific game state is different. Will occur. In other words, not only is the player given the advantage of being able to grasp the type of the specific game state according to the ball entry mode of the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the low discrimination section, but after that The advantage that the variable ball entry control according to the high expectation mode is executed is given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means which is in the open state in the low discrimination section.

Feature A16. The low identification section is the variable entry ball regardless of whether or not the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means which is the target of the variable entry control and is in the open state occurs during the section. The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the control is set to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the characteristic A16, when the first specific game state or the second specific game state is transitioned, the variable ball entry control is always executed a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while suppressing the loss of the player's satisfaction of having entered the specific game state.

Features A17. A plurality of the variable ball entering means are provided in the game area,
The variable ball entrance control is executed a plurality of times in the low discrimination section, and a predetermined variable of the plurality of variable ball entrance means is executed in a part of the execution times of the variable ball entrance control in the low discrimination section. Control object setting means for setting a variable ball entering means different from the predetermined variable ball entering means to be a control object in another execution time of the variable ball entering control (second execution) In the embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 has a function of executing the processing of steps S2213 and S2214).
The control target setting means has a mode in which each of the plurality of variable ball entrance means is selected as a control target in the low discrimination section in the first specific game state and the low discrimination section in the second specific game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A12 to A16, wherein the gaming machines are the same.

According to the characteristic A17, it is possible for the player to make different types of variable ball-entering means aiming to enter a game ball in the low discrimination section, and it is possible to prevent the game in the low discrimination section from becoming monotonous. Further, even in the configuration in which the monotonization is suppressed in this way, in the low identification section in the first specific game state and the low identification section in the second specific game state, each of the plurality of variable ball entrance means is controlled. The modes selected as are the same. Therefore, the function of not distinguishing between the first specific game state and the second specific game state in the low identification section is exerted.

Feature A18. As the plurality of variable ball entering means,
The variable entrance corresponding to the branch, which is the target of the variable entrance control and in which the occurrence of the entrance of the game ball in the open state is at least one condition for executing the variable entrance control thereafter. Ball means (second variable winning device 237),
Non-branch-compatible variable entry that is subject to the variable entry control and the occurrence of entry of the game ball in the open state is not included in the condition for executing the variable entry control thereafter. Ball means (first variable winning device 236),
Is equipped with
The control target setting means sets such that the non-branch-corresponding variable ball entrance means is a control target in the execution times of the variable ball entrance control other than the final time in the low classification section, and in the low classification section. In the final round of the variable ball entry control, the variable ball entry means corresponding to the branch is set as a control target,
The special control execution means, when the game ball enters the variable ball entrance means corresponding to the branch that is in the open state in the situation where the variable ball entrance control is being performed the last time in the low discrimination section. The gaming machine according to feature A17, characterized in that, as the special action, the variable variable ball control is newly performed after the low discrimination section, based on the occurrence.

According to the characteristic A18, when the variable ball entrance means corresponding to the branch is the object of the variable ball entrance control, the player pays attention to the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entrance means. In addition, when the non-branch-compatible variable ball entry means is subject to variable ball entry control, the attention to the occurrence of the ball entry of the game ball is slightly reduced, but the player can digest the specific game state with peace of mind. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the low discrimination section while maintaining the satisfaction of shifting to the specific game state.

Further, the role of one variable ball entrance means is not switched between the role corresponding to branching and the role corresponding to non-branching, but the role corresponding to branching and the role corresponding to non-branching for each hardware configuration of variable ball entering means. And are distinguished. As a result, it is necessary for the player to clearly understand whether it is time to pay attention to the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means or the time to digest the specific game state with peace of mind. You can

Features A19. When the game turning operation is started, the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition judging means is set and the game turning operation is ended, and the game turning operation of each game time is performed as one game time. A game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) so as to be displayed (in the first embodiment, a function and a display control device for executing the processing of step S1001 to step S1011 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72). 111, in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S2401 to S2408 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72),
Effect control means for the specific game state for performing an effect for the specific game state in the situation where the specific game state is being executed (in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S1012 to S1019 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72). And a display control device 111, a function of executing the processes of steps S2409 to S2415 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 in the second embodiment).
Equipped with
The game time control means is the notification result that the specific game state of the transfer destination cannot be identified regardless of whether the game state shifts to the first specific game state or the second specific game state. Termination means for terminating the diversion operation (a function of executing the process of step S1008 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing step S2405 of the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 in the second embodiment). Function to execute processing),
The production control means for the specific game state cannot identify the specific game state to be executed at least until the low identification section ends, regardless of whether the first specific game state or the second specific game state. Alternatively, means for performing an effect that is difficult to identify (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72, in the second embodiment, the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72). The game machine according to any one of features A12 to A18, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S2411 in step S2411.

According to the characteristic A19, whichever of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is executed at a timing before the low identification section has passed, from the notification result of the game revolving operation and the effect mode for the specific game state. The player cannot grasp what is being done. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility of playing a game in the low discrimination section while expecting to be a desirable one for the player from the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the degree of attention to the specific game state. Is improved.

Feature A20. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A variable ball which is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning hole 32a) formed to have a size in which a game ball can enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32),
The variable ball entrance control means for executing the variable ball entrance control to switch the variable ball entrance means to the open state after the variable ball entrance means is set to the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the special winning opening/closing process. Function to execute)
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the game state (function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result (each jackpot result and special off result) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the specific game state (opening and closing) in which the variable ball entry control is performed. Transition means for shifting the game state to the execution mode) (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the specific game state, it is configured to have a round game that continues until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, and is ended when the round game is executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times. A specific game state for round games has been set,
As the specific game state corresponding to the round game, the mode of the variable ball entry control during the specific game state is similar in appearance, but in the specific round game corresponding to a predetermined execution order, the variable ball entry A plurality of types of execution modes in which at least one of the total period during which the means is in the open state and the number of times of the variable ball entry control are different (for example, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result B and the explicit height) A gaming machine characterized by including an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the probability jackpot result B).

According to the characteristic A20, while the execution pattern of the variable entrance control is the same, it is possible to make the duration of the specific round game corresponding to the predetermined execution order different. Thus, for example, by performing an effect or notification according to the result of entering the variable ball entering means in a specific round game, the player can confirm the current setting by confirming the effect or notification. It is possible to predict the aspect.

Feature A21. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A variable ball which is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning hole 32a) formed to have a size in which a game ball can enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32),
The variable ball entrance control means for executing the variable ball entrance control to switch the variable ball entrance means to the open state after the variable ball entrance means is set to the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the special winning opening/closing process. Function to execute)
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the game state (function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result (each jackpot result and special off result) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the specific game state (opening and closing) in which the variable ball entry control is performed. Transition means for shifting the game state to the execution mode) (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the specific game state, it is configured to have a round game that continues until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, and is ended when the round game is executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times. A specific game state for round games has been set,
As a specific game state corresponding to the round game, the mode of the variable ball entry control executed in a plurality of consecutive round games from a predetermined execution order is similar in appearance, but specified among those plurality of round games In the round game, a plurality of types of execution modes are different in at least one of the total time period in which the variable ball entrance means is in the open state and the number of times of the variable ball entrance control (for example, an imprecise high certainty jackpot result B is triggered. The opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B) are included.

According to the feature A21, while the execution pattern of the variable ball entry control in at least the predetermined section is the same, it is possible to make the duration of the specific round game included in the predetermined section different. Thus, for example, by performing an effect or notification according to the result of entering the variable ball entering means in a specific round game, the player can confirm the current setting by confirming the effect or notification. It is possible to predict the aspect.

Feature A22. Based on the occurrence of the ball entering the variable ball entering means in the situation where the specific round game is being executed, a special notification for making a predetermined special notification by the notifying means (symbol display device 41) The gaming machine described in the feature A20 or A21, which is provided with a control unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S1014 to S1016 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 in the first embodiment).

By applying the configuration of this feature A22 to the configuration of the feature A20 or A21, it becomes possible for the player to predict the currently set control mode by confirming the special notification.

The invention of the characteristic group A is effective for the following problems.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, one provided with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen is known. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operation opening provided in a game area, a jackpot lottery is performed to determine whether or not a particular gaming state advantageous to the player such as a jackpot state is generated. , The variable display of the pattern is started. When the jackpot lottery is won, a combination of specific symbols and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state. With the transition to the specific game state, for example, opening and closing of the variable ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and a large amount of game balls are paid out.

For example, in more detail about the variable ball-entering device of the pachinko machine shown in Patent Document 1, in a situation where the game is not in a specific game state, the game ball cannot enter or is in a closed state where it is difficult to enter, and the specific game When it shifts to the state, it is switched to the open state a certain number of times.

Here, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, when the game state is the specific game state, the player's interest is likely to concentrate on how many game balls can be acquired. However, in the case of the above conventional pachinko machine, since the player can predict the number of game balls that can be acquired in the specific game state to some extent, there is a concern that the game in the specific game state may become monotonous.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on that the determination result of the transition determination means is a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-court result) corresponding to the transition of the game state, identification that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied A first transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71) for shifting the gaming state to the gaming state (opening/closing execution mode),
Second transition means for transitioning to a gaming state different from the gaming state before the specific gaming state when the ending condition is satisfied and the specific gaming state ends (when the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 ends) Function that executes the migration process of
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the management device to recognize that the game state has been transitioned, or an unrecognizable state that does not allow recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a transition mode in the case of a transition determination result in which the transition may be performed by both the first transition unit and the second transition unit, a mode during the specific game state and a mode after the specific game state A plurality of types of transition modes are set so that at least one of them is different,
The recognition control means, the game state transition mode is a first transition mode of the plurality of types of transition modes (for example, transition mode when the explicit high certainty jackpot result B is achieved, or a high frequency support mode) In the transition mode when the implicit high-precision jackpot result A is obtained), the recognition mode is set at a specific timing while the game mode transition mode is the second of the plurality of types of transition modes. In the case of a transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the low-probability jackpot result A is obtained or a transition mode when the implicit high-probability jackpot result A is obtained in the situation of the low frequency support mode) A gaming machine provided with setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for maintaining the unrecognizable state without setting the recognizable state.

In the gaming machine with the characteristic B1, the recognition means becomes the recognizable state when the gaming state transition occurs, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in the gaming hall where many gaming machines are installed. It will be possible.

In this case, the recognizable state is set at a specific timing in the first transition mode, while the unrecognizable state is maintained at a specific timing in the second transition mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to flexibly set the recognizable state in the case of the first transition mode and the case of the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. With this configuration, it is possible to perform excellent gaming machine management.

In addition, for example, when the management device is caused to recognize that the game state has changed, if there is a possibility that the effects of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may disappear, the state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit that.

As described above, it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention to the game.

The "specific timing" includes the start timing of the specific game state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific game state becomes the specific time, and the specific game device operates in the specific game state. The configuration includes the case where the operation of the game apparatus for the predetermined number of times is started or ended. Further, in the configuration in which the opening period and ending period are set in the specific game state, the timing during any of these periods is also included.

Feature B2. The first transition mode is a mode in which a certain degree of advantage is advantageous in the particular game state or in the game state thereafter.
The second transition mode is a mode in which the specific degree of advantage is disadvantageous,
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the situation in which the specific advantage degree is advantageous is started. On the other hand, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the recognition state is maintained in the unrecognizable state without being set to the recognizable state at the specific timing. Game machine.

According to the feature B2, the recognizable state is not uniformly set, but is flexibly set according to the content of the specific advantage degree of the transfer destination. As a result, it is possible to favorably manage a situation in which a certain degree of advantage is advantageous in a game hall or the like, while the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is caused by the execution of the management. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

Feature B3. The first transition mode is a mode in which after the specific game state, a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage becomes relatively advantageous, and shifts to the first game state,
The second transition mode is a mode in which after the specific game state, the specific element becomes a relatively disadvantageous transition to the second game state,
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the transition to the first game state is performed, while When the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the recognition state is maintained at the specific timing without being changed to the recognition possible state, and the feature B1 or B2 is described. Amusement machine.

According to the feature B3, the recognizable state is not uniformly set, but is flexibly set according to the gaming state after the specific gaming state. As a result, while the management of the game state after the specific game state is favorably performed in the game hall or the like, the effect of, for example, the setting of a plurality of types of transition modes is eliminated due to the execution of the management. It is possible to prevent it.

The specific element may be configured to be able to recognize from the operation of the gaming machine that the factor is advantageous.

Feature B4. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A specific ball-in portion (lower working port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter and which can be switched between an open state and a closed state
Acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific entrance portion (function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Equipped with
The transition determination means, if at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion, the determination is based on that condition,
The reception control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball-entering portion between the open state and the closed state, does not become the open state or has a relatively low chance of becoming the open state per unit time. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of being in the open state per unit time is relatively high.
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching mode is the high-frequency switching mode as the specific element, while the second gaming state is the low-frequency switching mode in which the switching mode is the specific element. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the gaming machine is in the following gaming state.

According to the feature B4, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, it is attempted to manage the frequency of entering the specific ball in the game hall or to open the specific ball in an unlawful manner. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the actions to be taken. Further, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific ball entering portion is made different, it is easy for the player to recognize which the switching mode is. Therefore, in the first transition mode that becomes the high frequency switching mode after the specific game state, the recognition state is set at a specific timing, and in the second transition mode that becomes the low frequency switching mode after the specific game state, it is recognized at the specific timing. Even if it is distinguished that the setting to the enabled state is not performed, the effect due to the setting of a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

In addition, the "specific entry ball portion" is provided in the above-mentioned game area, and has an opening formed to a size in which the game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the opening. And a second state in which entry of balls is less likely to occur than that can be configured".

Feature B5. As a mode of the specific game state, a mode (long mode or medium time mode) in which the degree of expectation of grant of a predetermined privilege is relatively high, and a mode in which it is relatively low (short time mode) are set,
The specific game state in the first transition mode and the specific game state in the second transition mode progress in the relatively low mode and the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation is the first transition mode and the second mode. It is configured so that a low discrimination section that cannot be discriminated or is difficult to discriminate which one of the transition modes is related,
If the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means is after the low discrimination section is started and before the transition to the first game state is performed. While setting to the recognizable state at a timing, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the recognizable state is maintained without the recognizable state even at the specific timing. The gaming machine according to the feature B3 or B4, which is characterized by:

According to the feature B5, it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or disadvantageous after a specific game state in a low identification section which is set to be indistinguishable. A game will be played while expecting an advantageous state after the specific game state. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set until at least the timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device. There is no. In addition, the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine is set. Management problems are unlikely to occur. Furthermore, when a specific element is advantageous after the specific game state, since the recognizable state is set before the transition to the first game state, whether or not the specific element is advantageous It will be possible to perform good management.

Feature B6. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A variable ball which is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning hole 32a) formed to have a size in which a game ball can enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32),
Variable ball control means for executing variable ball control for switching the variable ball means to the closed state after the variable ball means is in the open state (function of executing a special winning opening/closing process in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Equipped with
The specific game state is a game state in which the variable ball control is performed by the variable ball control means,
As a unit mode when the variable ball entrance control means performs the variable ball entrance control once, the expected degree of entering the game ball into the variable ball entrance means in the open state is relative. The high-expectancy mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and the low-expectancy mode (short-time mode) are set so as to be relatively high or low,
In the specific game state in the first transition mode and the specific game state in the second transition mode, the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed as a section from the start timing to at least the middle timing. And a low discrimination section in which it is difficult or difficult to discriminate which one of the first transition mode and the second transition mode the operation of the variable ball entering means looks like. Has been done,
If the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means is after the low discrimination section is started and before the transition to the first game state is performed. While setting to the recognizable state at a timing, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the recognizable state is maintained without the recognizable state even at the specific timing. The gaming machine according to the feature B3 or B4, which is characterized by:

According to the feature B6, it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or disadvantageous after the specific game state in the low identification section in which the player is not identified in the low identification section. A game will be played while expecting an advantageous state after the specific game state. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set until at least some timing in the low discrimination section, the effect of setting the low discrimination section is not erased due to the gaming machine management by the management device. Absent. In addition, the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, the game machine will not be able to manage the ball. , The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, when a specific element is advantageous after the specific game state, since the recognizable state is set before the transition to the first game state, whether or not the specific element is advantageous It will be possible to perform good management.

In addition, as the specific game state, it is configured to have a round game that is controlled to be ended when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches the upper limit number, and the round game is further configured. In a configuration in which a specific game state corresponding to a round game is set, which is ended based on the execution of a predetermined upper limit number of times,
In the high expectation mode, during the period in which the variable ball entrance control according to the mode is being executed, the upper limit number of game balls are likely to enter the variable ball entrance means that is the control target. While it is an aspect,
In the low expectation mode, during the period in which the variable ball entrance control according to the mode is being executed, the upper limit number of game balls do not enter the variable ball entrance means that is the control target, or The configuration may be such that it is unlikely to occur.

Further, in order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering the game ball between the low-expectancy mode and the high-expectancy mode, in the low-expectancy mode, the period during which the target of variable entry control is in the open state. May be set to a period shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Further, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of the variable ball entry control is in the open state is a period equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and the firing cycle of the game ball×n (n is greater than the upper limit number It may be configured such that it is set for a period of a small number) or less. Further, in a configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the above n may be a number of "1", "2" or "3".

Feature B7. In the low identification section, a low identification effect of a visually indistinguishable or difficult-to-identify appearance that is the specific game state according to the first transition mode or the specific game state according to the second transition mode Equipped with effect control means (function for executing effect determination processing for the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and display control device 111) to be performed by the execution means (symbol display device 41),
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means is at the specific timing after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first game state is performed. While setting to the recognizable state, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the recognition state is maintained without the recognition state even if the specific timing comes. The gaming machine according to feature B6.

According to the characteristic B7, it is difficult to recognize whether the specific element is advantageous or disadvantageous after the specific game state in the situation where the low discrimination effect is performed, so that the player operates the variable ball entering means. The player plays the game while visually checking the mode and the low identification effect and expecting to be in an advantageous state after the specific game state. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is being performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect may be lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device. Absent. Also, while the low identification effect is being performed, the expectation level of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, the game is not played. Problems are unlikely to occur with regards to managing the pitch of the aircraft. Furthermore, when the specific element is advantageous after the specific game state, the recognizable state is set after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first game state is performed. It is possible to manage well whether or not a particular element is advantageous.

Feature B8. The setting means sets the state of the recognizing means to a first recognizable state in which the management device can recognize that the transition to the specific game state has been performed or a first unrecognizable state in which the management device cannot recognize. Is the first setting means for
Further, the control means for recognition is in a second recognizable state in which the management device can recognize that the transition to the first game state has been made, or a second unrecognizable state in which it is unrecognizable, for the recognition. Any one of features B3 to B7 characterized by including a second setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the means. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B8, the management device can distinguish between the transition to the specific game state and the transition to the first game state, so that the specific game can be recognized. It becomes possible to manage whether or not it is in the state, and it is possible to manage whether or not the transition to the first game state has been made without the termination of the specific game state as a trigger. Become.

In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, if the first recognizable state is not set in any transition mode, 2 When it is set to the recognizable state, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific game state. On the other hand, the configuration of the characteristic B3 is provided, and when shifting to the first gaming state after the specific gaming state, the setting to the first recognizable state is performed in advance, so that the above management can be performed well. Can be

Feature B9. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A specific ball-in portion (lower working port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter and which can be switched between an open state and a closed state
Acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific entrance portion (function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Equipped with
The shift determining means determines that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion, and performs the determination based on that condition, and The determination mode has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The reception control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball-entering portion between the open state and the closed state, does not become the open state or has a relatively low chance of becoming the open state per unit time. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of being in the open state per unit time is relatively high.
In the first transition mode, after the specific game state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific game state, and the switching mode is switched to the high-frequency switching mode. And
In the second transition mode, after the specific game state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific game state, and the switching mode is changed to the low frequency switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B8.

The type of transition determination mode can be indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the gaming machine, whereas the switching mode is a mode that changes the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion, so switching It is difficult to recognize which mode is which. Under such circumstances, the feature B9 does not set the recognizable state in relation to the transition determination mode, but sets the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode. This prevents the player from predicting the transition determination mode after the specific game state, which is to increase the degree of attention to the game, and eliminates the effect of entering the specific ball entry section in the game hall. It is possible to satisfactorily manage the ball frequency and monitor the act of illegally opening the specific ball entrance portion.

In addition, the "specific entry ball portion" is provided in the above-mentioned game area, and has an opening formed to a size in which the game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the opening. And a second state in which entry of balls is less likely to occur than that can be configured".

Feature B10. The first transition mode and the second transition mode are both transition modes that are performed with the same transition determination result (for example, the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result A) as a trigger, while the first transition mode is a predetermined transition mode. Based on the transition mode being performed based on the same transition determination result in the game state, the second transition mode is based on the same transition determination result in the game state different from the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B9, which is a transition mode that is performed.

According to the characteristic B10, even if the same transition determination result is obtained, the transition mode of the game state after that is different, and it is possible to diversify the game without increasing the types of transition determination results. Even in this case, the recognizable state is set in a flexible manner according to the shifting manner, instead of setting the recognizable state by distinguishing uniformly based on the shift determination result. As a result, it is possible to manage the gaming machine through the setting of the recognizable state without losing the above effect.

Feature B11. As a mode of the specific game state, a mode (long mode or medium time mode) in which the degree of expectation of grant of a predetermined privilege is relatively high, and a mode in which it is relatively low (short time mode) are set,
As a result of the determination by the transition determination means, a transition to the specific game state due to the relatively low mode occurs, but when the specific game state ends, the same game state as the game state before the specific game state. Partial transition result (special disconnection result) to return to the state is set,
The recognition control means, when a game state transition occurs based on the partial transition result, maintains the recognition-disabled state without setting the recognition-enabled state,
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the mode in the specific game state based on the fact that the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation from the start timing of the specific game state to at least the intermediate timing is the partial transition result. Or, it is configured to generate a low discrimination section that is difficult to discriminate,
When the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a predetermined timing after the low discrimination section is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

According to the feature B11, the partial transition result is set, so that the specific game state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the award rate of the privilege to the player and the influence on the transition rate of the game state excluding the specific game state. It is possible to use the transition to as a production. Further, in the specific game state in the second transition mode, since a low discrimination section that is indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate from the specific game state based on the partial transition result occurs, the specific game state is sandwiched in the low discrimination section. A game is played while predicting whether a transition of the game state will occur. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set until at least the timing in the low discrimination section, the gaming machine management by the management device does not lose the effect of setting the low discrimination section. In addition, the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine is set. Management problems are unlikely to occur.

Feature B12. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A variable ball which is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning hole 32a) formed to have a size in which a game ball can enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32),
Variable ball control means for executing variable ball control for switching the variable ball means to the closed state after the variable ball means is in the open state (function of executing a special winning opening/closing process in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Equipped with
The specific game state is a game state in which the variable ball control is performed by the variable ball control means,
As a unit mode when the variable ball entrance control means performs the variable ball entrance control once, the expected degree of entering the game ball into the variable ball entrance means in the open state is relative. The high-expectancy mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and the low-expectancy mode (short-time mode) are set so as to be relatively high or low,
Furthermore, as a determination result of the transition determination means, a transition to the specific game state occurs after the variable ball entrance control according to the low expectation mode has been performed a specific number of times, but the specific game state ends. In this case, a partial transition result (special disconnection result) for returning to the same gaming state as the gaming state before the particular gaming state is set,
The recognition control means, when a game state transition occurs based on the partial transition result, maintains the recognition-disabled state without setting the recognition-enabled state,
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the specific game state mode based on the partial transition result of the operation mode of the variable ball entering means from the start timing of the specific game state to at least the midway timing or It is configured to generate a low discrimination section that is difficult to discriminate,
When the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a predetermined timing after the low discrimination section is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

According to the feature B12, the partial transition result is set, so that the specific game state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the rate of granting the privilege to the player and suppressing the influence on the transition rate of the game state excluding the specific game state. It is possible to use the transition to as a production. Further, in the specific game state in the second transition mode, since a low discrimination section that is indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate from the specific game state based on the partial transition result occurs, the specific game state is sandwiched in the low discrimination section. A game is played while predicting whether a transition of the game state will occur. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set until at least some timing in the low discrimination section, the effect of setting the low discrimination section is not erased due to the gaming machine management by the management device. Absent. In addition, the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, the game machine will not be able to manage the ball. , The problem is hard to occur.

Feature B13. Performing a low-identification production in the low-discrimination section in a visually unidentifiable or difficult-to-discriminate manner in terms of whether it is the specific game state according to the partial transition result or the specific game state according to the second transition mode The means (symbol display device 41) is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111),
Characteristic B12 characterized in that, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the low discrimination effect ends. Game machine.

According to the characteristic B13, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is being performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is deleted due to the gaming machine management by the management device. There is no end. Also, while the low identification effect is being performed, the expectation level of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, the game is not played. Problems are unlikely to occur with regards to managing the pitch of the aircraft.

Feature B14. A specific ball-in portion (lower working port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter and which can be switched between an open state and a closed state
Acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific entrance portion (function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Equipped with
The shift determining means determines that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion, and performs the determination based on that condition, and The determination mode has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The reception control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball-entering portion between the open state and the closed state, does not become the open state or has a relatively low chance of becoming the open state per unit time. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of being in the open state per unit time is relatively high.
In the second transition mode, after the specific game state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific game state, and the switching mode is changed to the low frequency switching mode. And
A feature B12 characterized in that the setting means does not set to the recognizable state triggered by the transition of the game state when the transition state of the game state is the second transition mode. Or the game machine described in B13.

The type of transition determination mode can be indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the gaming machine, whereas the switching mode is a mode that changes the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion, so switching It is difficult to recognize which mode is which. In such a circumstance, in the feature B14, the transition determination mode is changed across the specific game state, but in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the low-frequency switching mode, the recognizable state is triggered by the change. No settings are made. As a result, when the specific game state having the low discrimination section occurs, it is possible to continue the player's expectation not only in the low discrimination section but also after the specific game state.

In addition, the "specific entry ball portion" is provided in the above-mentioned game area, and has an opening formed to a size in which the game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the opening. And a second state in which entry of balls is less likely to occur than that can be configured".

Feature B15. A specific ball-in portion (lower working port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter and which can be switched between an open state and a closed state
Acceptance control means (function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific ball entering portion;
Equipped with
The shift determining means determines that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion, and performs the determination based on that condition, and The determination mode has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The reception control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball-entering portion between the open state and the closed state, does not become the open state or has a relatively low chance of becoming the open state per unit time. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of being in the open state per unit time is relatively high.
In the second transition mode, after the specific game state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific game state, and the switching mode shifts to the high-frequency switching mode. And
When the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the setting means is the timing after the low discrimination section is started and before the transition to the game state after the specific game state is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature B12 or B13, wherein the gaming machine is set to the recognizable state.

The type of transition determination mode can be indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the gaming machine, whereas the switching mode is a mode that changes the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion, so switching It is difficult to recognize which mode is which. In such a circumstance, in the characteristic B15, the transition determination mode is changed across the specific game state, and in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the high-frequency switching mode, the game state after the specific game state is changed. It is set to the recognizable state at the timing before the transition is performed. As a result, it is possible to play a game while expecting to be in an advantageous state after a specific game state in a low identification section, and also to control the frequency of entering a specific ball in the game hall and to identify illegally. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the act of opening the ball entrance portion.

In addition, the "specific entry ball portion" is provided in the above-mentioned game area, and has an opening formed to a size in which the game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the opening. And a second state in which entry of balls is less likely to occur than that can be configured".

Feature B16. The first transition mode is a mode in which the degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege is awarded during the specific game state is relatively high.
The second transition mode is a mode in which the degree of expectation that the predetermined privilege is awarded during the specific game state is relatively low.
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the situation in which the predetermined privilege can be granted is started. On the other hand, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, it is maintained in the unrecognizable state without being in the recognizable state at the specific timing. The gaming machine according to any one of B15.

According to the feature B16, the recognizable state is not uniformly set, but is flexibly set in relation to the situation in which a predetermined privilege can be given in the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to favorably manage the awarding of a privilege in a game hall or the like, while preventing the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes from being lost due to the execution of the management. It becomes possible to do.

Feature B17. The management device performs a predetermined notification on a display device (data counter DC) provided corresponding to the gaming machine in the gaming hall, based on the fact that the recognition means recognizes that the recognition is possible. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B16, which is characterized in that the gaming machine.

According to the feature B17, when a predetermined notification is given in the game hall, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described.

Feature B18. Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game turning operation is started, and the game turning operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the shift determining means based on the satisfaction of the condition. As one of the game times, game time control for controlling a predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 41) so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition. Means (a function and a display control device 111 for executing the processes of steps S1001 to S1011 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72),
Effect control means for a specific game state for performing an effect for the specific game state in a state where the specific game state is being executed (function and display for executing the processing of steps S1012 to S1013 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) Control device 111),
Equipped with
The game time control means is unable to identify the mode of the transfer destination regardless of whether the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. Equipped with an ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1008 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) for ending the game reusing operation,
The effect control means for the specific game state is at least halfway from the start timing regardless of whether the game state transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. A feature (a function of executing the processing of step S1101 to step S1110 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) for performing an effect in which the transition destination mode cannot be identified or is difficult to identify is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B17.

According to the characteristic B18, the player grasps whether the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode, from the notification result of the game revolving operation and the effect mode for the specific game state. difficult. As a result, the possibility of playing the game in the specific game state is increased while expecting to be desirable for the player from the first transition mode and the second transition mode, and the degree of attention to the specific game state is improved. Is planned.

Feature B19. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on that the determination result of the transition determination means is a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-court result) corresponding to the transition of the game state, identification that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied A first transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71) for shifting the gaming state to the gaming state (opening/closing execution mode),
Second transition means for transitioning to a gaming state different from the gaming state before the specific gaming state when the ending condition is satisfied and the specific gaming state ends (when the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 ends) Function that executes the migration process of
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main controller 71 of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the specific device to recognize that the game state has been changed or an unrecognizable state that does not allow the recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a transition mode in the case of a transition determination result in which the transition may be performed by both the first transition unit and the second transition unit, a mode during the specific game state and a mode after the specific game state A plurality of types of transition modes are set so that at least one of them is different,
The recognition control means, the game state transition mode is a first transition mode of the plurality of types of transition modes (for example, transition mode when the explicit high certainty jackpot result B is achieved, or a high frequency support mode) In the transition mode when the implicit high-precision jackpot result A is obtained), the recognition mode is set at a specific timing while the game mode transition mode is the second of the plurality of types of transition modes. In the case of a transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the low-probability jackpot result A is obtained or a transition mode when the implicit high-probability jackpot result A is obtained in the situation of the low frequency support mode) A gaming machine provided with setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for maintaining the unrecognizable state without setting the recognizable state.

In the gaming machine with the feature B19, when the game state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes the recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well.

In this case, the recognizable state is set at a specific timing in the first transition mode, while the unrecognizable state is maintained at a specific timing in the second transition mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to flexibly set the recognizable state in the case of the first transition mode and the case of the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. With this configuration, it is possible to perform excellent gaming machine management.

In addition, for example, when making a specific device recognize that the game state has shifted, if there is a possibility that the effects of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may disappear, the state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit that.

As described above, it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention to the game.

The "specific timing" includes the start timing of the specific game state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific game state becomes the specific time, and the specific game device operates in the specific game state. The configuration includes the case where the operation of the game apparatus for the predetermined number of times is started or ended. Further, in the configuration in which the opening period and ending period are set in the specific game state, the timing during any of these periods is also included.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-range result) corresponding to the game state transition, the game state is transferred to the specific game state (open/close execution mode). State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the management device to recognize that the game state has been transitioned, or an unrecognizable state that does not allow recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a transition mode when the determination result that the transition to the specific game state is made is made, in a first section in which the expectation degree of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low and a relatively high mode. A specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is obtained) having a second section that progresses is set,
The recognition control means specifies the game mode transition mode such that at least a part of the first section is in the unrecognizable state and at least a part of the second section is in the recognizable state. The game machine is provided with a setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for switching the setting of the recognition means in the case of the transition mode.

In the gaming machine with the characteristic C1, the recognition means is in the recognizable state when the gaming state transition occurs, so that the gaming machine can be well managed in a gaming hall where many gaming machines are installed. It will be possible. Further, as the transition mode of the game state, a specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section occur is set, so that the execution of the specific game state is performed while suppressing the influence on the award rate of the predetermined privilege. It is possible to use as a game, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, it is not uniformly set to the recognizable state, but the recognizable state and the unrecognizable state are set according to the staying section. The setting of the recognition means is switched between. As a result, when the game mode transition mode becomes a specific transition mode, the recognizable state is set flexibly, and good gaming machine management is performed in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. Is possible.

Feature C2. The specific transition mode is a mode in which, as the specific game state, a transition is made to a specific game state corresponding to switching having the first section and the second section,
The setting means is in the unrecognizable state in at least a part of the first section, and in the recognizable state in at least a part of the second section, in the specific game state corresponding to the switching. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the setting of the recognition means is switched.

According to the characteristic C2, since the specific game state corresponding to the switching is set as the specific game state, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the specific game state. Further, in the specific game state corresponding to the switching, it becomes possible to favorably manage the gaming machine.

Feature C3. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A variable ball which is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning hole 32a) formed to have a size in which a game ball can enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32),
Variable ball control means for executing variable ball control for switching the variable ball means to the closed state after the variable ball means is in the open state (function of executing a special winning opening/closing process in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Equipped with
The specific game state is a game state in which the variable ball control is performed by the variable ball control means,
As a unit mode when the variable ball entrance control means performs the variable ball entrance control once, the expected degree of entering the game ball into the variable ball entrance means in the open state is relative. The high-expectancy mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and the low-expectancy mode (short-time mode) are set so as to be relatively high or low,
The first section is a section in which the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed, and the second section is a section in which the variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is performed. The gaming machine described in the characteristic C1 or C2.

According to the characteristic C3, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable ball entering means in the first section, and it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable ball entering means in the second section. As a result, the game can be diversified during the specific game state by using the variable ball entering means. In this case, by providing the configuration of the characteristic C2, the recognizable state can be flexibly set depending on whether the operation of the variable ball entering means is used as an effect or for the purpose of granting a privilege. As a result, in the configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific game state, it becomes possible to perform good gaming machine management. Further, for example, in the first section in which the effect is provided through the operation of the variable ball entering means, it is emphasized that the attention level of the game is improved, and in the second section in which the frequency of giving the privilege to the player is improved, the gaming machine management is performed. Can be satisfactorily performed.

Feature C4. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-range result) corresponding to the game state transition, the game state is transferred to the specific game state (open/close execution mode). State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the management device to recognize that the game state has been transitioned, or an unrecognizable state that does not allow recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a transition mode when the determination result that the transition to the specific game state is performed is made, a plurality of types such that at least one of the mode during the specific game state and the mode after the specific game state is different The transition mode of is set,
When the game mode transition mode is a specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the explicit high certainty jackpot result B is obtained), the recognition control means is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Compared with the case of (for example, a transition mode when an explicit high-precision jackpot result is obtained), a setting unit that delays the timing of setting the recognizable state (processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71) A game machine characterized by having a function to execute.

In the gaming machine with the characteristic C4, the recognition means becomes the recognizable state when the gaming state transition occurs, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in the gaming hall where many gaming machines are installed. It will be possible.

In this case, when the game mode transition mode is a specific transition mode, the timing for setting the recognition-enabled state is delayed compared to when the game mode transition mode is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. This makes it possible to flexibly set the recognizable state depending on whether it is a specific transition mode or a predetermined transition mode, and in the configuration in which a plurality of types of transition modes are set as described above, It becomes possible to manage the gaming machine satisfactorily.

In addition, for example, when the management device is caused to recognize that the game state has changed, if there is a possibility that the effects of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may disappear, the state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit that. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is not set at all but is delayed, it is possible to manage the gaming machine at all.

Feature C5. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-range result) corresponding to the game state transition, the game state is transferred to the specific game state (open/close execution mode). State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the management device to recognize that the game state has been transitioned, or an unrecognizable state that does not allow recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a mode of the specific game state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of grant of a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long time mode or medium time mode) and a relatively low mode (short time mode) are set. ,
The state transition means, based on that the determination result of the transition determination means is the first determination result (for example, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B), the section that proceeds in the relatively low mode is at least from the start timing. This is to shift to a first specific game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle timing,
When shifting to the first specific game state, the recognition control means delays the timing of setting the recognition enabled state until after the timing in the middle of the section (step S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 and A game machine having a function of executing the process of step S512).

In the gaming machine with the characteristic C5, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognizing means becomes the recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in the gaming hall where many gaming machines are installed. It will be possible. Further, since the first specific game state in which the section where the expectation level of the grant of the predetermined privilege is relatively low is generated at least halfway from the start timing is set, the predetermined privilege is granted. It is possible to use the execution of the specific game state as an effect while suppressing the influence on the rate, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, in the case of the first specific game state, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing. As a result, when the first specific game state is to be entered, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first specific game state is set as the specific game state. In, it becomes possible to favorably manage the gaming machine.

In addition, for example, in the case where the management device is caused to recognize that the game state has changed, if there is a possibility that the effect of setting a plurality of types of the specific game state may be lost, the state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit what is done.

Feature C6. As a game mode transition mode triggered by the first determination result, a second section in which the game content related to grant of a privilege is changed after the first section that progresses in the relatively low mode. The specific aspect that occurs is set,
When the game mode transition mode is the specific mode, the setting unit sets the recognizable state after the timing in the middle of the first section and before the second section ends. The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized in that

According to the characteristic C6, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the game content related to the grant of the privilege, and the first section is set as the game state transition mode triggered by the first determination result. With the configuration in which the second section and the second section are set, it is possible to favorably manage the gaming machine. Further, for example, even if the recognizable state is not set, it is important to improve the degree of attention of the game in the first section where it is difficult to cause a problem in the game machine management, while the game machine management is performed in the second section. Can be satisfactorily performed.

Feature C7. The first specific game state is configured such that after the first section continuing in the relatively low mode, the second section proceeding in the relatively high mode occurs.
When shifting to the first specific game state, the setting means sets the state in the recognizable state after the timing in the middle of the first section and before the second section ends. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or C6.

According to the characteristic C7, the recognizable state is flexibly set depending on whether or not the degree of expectation of a predetermined privilege is high, and thus the first section and the second section are set in the first specific game state. With this configuration, it is possible to perform excellent gaming machine management. Further, for example, in the first section where a problem in management of the gaming machine is unlikely to occur even if the recognizable state is not set, it is important to improve the attention level of the game, and the expectation level of a predetermined privilege is relatively high. When a relatively high second section is generated, it is possible to favorably manage the gaming machine.

Feature C8. The state transition means transitions to the first specific game state based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. (For example, based on the fact that the explicit high-probability jackpot result A or the special outlier result) has been reached, the second specific gaming state (for example, pattern A of the pattern A in which the relatively low aspect continues from the start timing to at least halfway timing) Open/close execution mode)
The first specific game state and the second specific game state progress in the relatively low mode and the appearance mode of the game machine operation is one of the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It is configured to generate a low identification section that is indistinguishable or difficult to identify whether it is related,
In the case of shifting to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a specific timing after the low discrimination section is started, and shifts to the first specific gaming state The gaming machine according to feature C6 or C7, which is set to the recognizable state after the specific timing and before the second section ends.

According to the characteristic C8, the game is performed while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low discrimination section where the discrimination is made impossible. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set until at least a specific timing in the low discrimination section, the effect of setting the low discrimination section is not lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device. .. Further, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific game state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is low, even if the recognizable state is not set, there is a problem in gaming machine management. Is hard to occur. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, so that it is possible to satisfactorily manage whether or not it is the second section. ..

Feature C9. When shifting to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the low discrimination section elapses, and when shifting to the first specific gaming state, the low discrimination section The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the gaming machine is set to the recognizable state after that and before the start timing of the second section.

According to the characteristic C9, it is possible to prevent the effect of setting the low discrimination section over the entire low discrimination section from being lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device, and At the timing when the section starts, it becomes possible for the management device to recognize it.

Feature C10. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A variable ball which is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning hole 32a) formed to have a size in which a game ball can enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32),
Variable ball control means for executing variable ball control for switching the variable ball means to the closed state after the variable ball means is in the open state (function of executing a special winning opening/closing process in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Privilege giving means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for giving a bonus to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the opening of the variable ball entering device.
Equipped with
The specific game state is a game state in which the variable ball control is performed by the variable ball control means,
As a unit mode when the variable ball entrance control means performs the variable ball entrance control once, the expected degree of entering the game ball into the variable ball entrance means in the open state is relative. The high-expectancy mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and the low-expectancy mode (short-time mode) are set so as to be relatively high or low,
The first section is a section in which the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed, and the second section is a section in which the variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C6 to C9.

According to the characteristic C10, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable ball entering means in the first section, and it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable ball entering means in the second section. As a result, the game can be diversified during the specific game state by using the variable ball entering means. In this case, since the features C3 and C4 are provided, the recognizable state can be set depending on whether the operation of the variable ball entering means is used as an effect or for the purpose of giving a privilege. By being performed flexibly, it is possible to favorably manage the gaming machine in the configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific game state. Further, for example, in the first section in which the effect is provided through the operation of the variable ball entering means, it is emphasized that the attention level of the game is improved, and in the second section in which the frequency of giving the privilege to the player is improved, the gaming machine management is performed. Can be satisfactorily performed.

Feature C11. The state transition means transitions to the first specific game state based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. (For example, based on the fact that the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A), the relatively low aspect continues from the start timing to at least some timing in the middle of the second specific game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode of pattern A) To move to
The first specific game state and the second specific game state are progressed by the variable entrance control according to the low expectation mode, and at the appearance of the operation of the variable entrance means, the first specific game state. It is configured such that a low discrimination section arises from the start timing because it is impossible or difficult to discriminate which of the state and the second specific game state it is related to,
In the case of shifting to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a specific timing after the low discrimination section is started, and shifts to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature C10, wherein the gaming machine is set to the recognizable state after the specific timing and before the second section ends.

According to the characteristic C11, the game is performed while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low discrimination section where the discrimination is made impossible. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set until the specific timing in the low discrimination section, the effect of setting the low discrimination section is not lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device. In addition, the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, the game machine will not be able to manage the ball. , The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, so that it is possible to satisfactorily manage whether or not it is the second section. ..

Feature C12. When shifting to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the low discrimination section elapses, and when shifting to the first specific gaming state, the low discrimination section The gaming machine according to feature C11, which is set to the recognizable state after that and before the start timing of the second section.

According to the characteristic C12, it is possible to prevent the effect of setting the low discrimination section over the entire low discrimination section from disappearing due to the gaming machine management by the management device, and At the timing when the section starts, it becomes possible for the management device to recognize it.

Feature C13. In the low identification section the production execution means (symbol display device 41), in the low identification section, a low identification effect in a visually unidentifiable or difficult-to-identify manner in which the first specific game state or the second specific game state is seen. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111) to be performed,
When shifting to the second specific game state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the low discrimination effect ends, and when shifting to the first specific game state, the low discrimination effect. The gaming machine according to the feature C11 or C12, which is set to the recognizable state after the end of the above and before the end of the second section.

According to the characteristic C13, the effect of setting the low discrimination section can be further enhanced by performing the low discrimination effect in the low discrimination section. In this case, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is being performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device. There is no such thing. Also, while the low identification effect is being performed, the expectation level of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, the game is not played. Problems are unlikely to occur with regards to managing the pitch of the aircraft. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, so that it is possible to satisfactorily manage whether or not it is the second section. ..

Feature C14. As a game state to be shifted after the specific game state, a case where a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous are set,
As a game mode transition mode including a transition to the second specific game state, a predetermined transition mode is set in which after the second specific game state, the specific element shifts to a game state in which the specific element is advantageous. ,
Features C8, C9, wherein the setting means sets the recognizable state before the start timing of the game state in which the specific element is advantageous in the predetermined transition mode. The gaming machine according to any one of C11 to C13.

According to the characteristic C14, in the low discrimination section, the game is performed while predicting whether the second section will occur after that or the game state in which the specific element is advantageous will occur, and attention will be paid to the game. It is possible to increase the degree. Further, when the specific element becomes advantageous after the second specific game state, since the recognizable state is set before the transition to the game state, whether or not the specific element becomes advantageous It will be possible to perform good management.

Feature C15. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A specific ball-in portion (lower working port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter and which can be switched between an open state and a closed state
Acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific entrance portion (function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
Equipped with
The transition determination means, if at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion, the determination is based on that condition,
The reception control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball-entering portion between the open state and the closed state, does not become the open state or has a relatively low chance of becoming the open state per unit time. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of being in the open state per unit time is relatively high.
As a game mode transition mode including a transition to the second specific game state, a predetermined transition mode is set in which after the second specific game state, the game state becomes the high-frequency switching mode,
In the case of the predetermined transition mode, the setting means sets the recognizable state before the start timing of the game state in the high-frequency switching mode, C8, C9, C11 to C13 The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic C15, the game is performed while predicting whether the second section or the game state in the high-frequency switching mode will occur in the low discrimination section, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible. In addition, after the second specific game state, when transitioning to the high-frequency switching mode game state, the recognition state is set before the transition to the game state, so that the game state It becomes possible to satisfactorily control whether or not it will happen.

In particular, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, management of the frequency of entrance to the specific entrance in the game hall and monitoring of acts to illegally open the specific entrance And so on. In addition, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific ball entering portion is made different, it is easy for the player to recognize which of the switching modes is, and therefore, when shifting to the gaming state which is the high frequency switching mode. Even if the recognizable state is set, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

In addition, the "specific entry ball portion" is provided in the above-mentioned game area, and has an opening formed to a size in which the game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the opening. And a second state in which entry of balls is less likely to occur than that can be configured".

Feature C16. The setting means sets the state of the recognizing means to a first recognizable state in which the management device can recognize that the transition to the specific game state has been performed or a first unrecognizable state in which the management device cannot recognize. Is the first setting means for
Further, the control means for recognition is in a second recognizable state in which the management device can recognize that the transition to the gaming state in the high-frequency switching mode has been performed, or a second unrecognizable state in which it cannot be recognized. Characteristic C15 characterized in that it is provided with a second setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S516, S905 and S915 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the recognition means. Game machine.

According to the characteristic C16, the management device can distinguish between the transition to the specific game state and the transition to the high-frequency switching mode game state. Therefore, it becomes possible to manage whether or not the specific game state is in progress, and also to manage whether or not the transition to the high frequency switching mode has been performed without the termination of the specific game state as a trigger. It becomes possible.

In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the first recognizable state is not set in any of the specific game states. Then, when the second recognizable state is set, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific game state. On the other hand, with the configuration of the above characteristic C15, after the second specific game state, when the game state becomes the high-frequency switching mode, the first recognizable state is set in advance. Therefore, it is possible to favorably perform the above management.

Feature C17. The second specific game state is set so that the mode after the low identification section is different from the case of the first specific game state,
Characteristic C8, characterized in that the setting means sets to the recognizable state when the same delay period elapses in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state. , C9, the gaming machine according to any one of C11 to C16.

According to the characteristic C17, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already described while simplifying the process related to the setting of the delay period.

Feature C18. The second determination result is that the transition to the second specific game state due to the relatively low aspect occurs, but when the second specific game state ends, the game state before the second specific game state It is the judgment result that will return to the same gaming state as
Features C8, C9, C11 characterized in that the recognition control means does not set to the recognizable state triggered by the transition of the game state when the second determination result is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of to C13.

According to the characteristic C18, it is possible to flexibly set the recognizable state in accordance with the game mode transition mode.

Feature C19. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-range result) corresponding to the game state transition, the game state is transferred to the specific game state (open/close execution mode). State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main controller 71 of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the specific device to recognize that the game state has been changed or an unrecognizable state that does not allow the recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a transition mode when the determination result that the transition to the specific game state is made is made, in a first section in which the expectation degree of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low and a relatively high mode. A specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is obtained) having a second section that progresses is set,
The recognition control means specifies the game mode transition mode such that at least a part of the first section is in the unrecognizable state and at least a part of the second section is in the recognizable state. The game machine is provided with a setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for switching the setting of the recognition means in the case of the transition mode.

In the gaming machine with the feature C19, when the transition of the gaming state occurs, the recognition means becomes the recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well. Further, as the transition mode of the game state, a specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section occur is set, so that the execution of the specific game state is performed while suppressing the influence on the award rate of the predetermined privilege. It is possible to use as a game, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, it is not uniformly set to the recognizable state, but the recognizable state and the unrecognizable state are set according to the staying section. The setting of the recognition means is switched between. As a result, when the game mode transition mode becomes a specific transition mode, the recognizable state is set flexibly, and good gaming machine management is performed in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. Is possible.

Feature C20. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-range result) corresponding to the game state transition, the game state is transferred to the specific game state (open/close execution mode). State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main controller 71 of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the specific device to recognize that the game state has been changed or an unrecognizable state that does not allow the recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a transition mode when the determination result that the transition to the specific game state is performed is made, a plurality of types such that at least one of the mode during the specific game state and the mode after the specific game state is different The transition mode of is set,
When the game mode transition mode is a specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the explicit high certainty jackpot result B is obtained), the recognition control means is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Compared with the case of (for example, a transition mode when an explicit high-precision jackpot result is obtained), a setting unit that delays the timing of setting the recognizable state (processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71) A game machine characterized by having a function to execute.

In the gaming machine with the characteristic C20, when the transition of the gaming state occurs, the recognition means is in the recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well.

In this case, when the game mode transition mode is a specific transition mode, the timing for setting the recognition-enabled state is delayed compared to when the game mode transition mode is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. This makes it possible to flexibly set the recognizable state depending on whether it is a specific transition mode or a predetermined transition mode, and in the configuration in which a plurality of types of transition modes are set as described above, It becomes possible to manage the gaming machine satisfactorily.

In addition, for example, when making a specific device recognize that the game state has shifted, if there is a possibility that the effects of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may disappear, the state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit that. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is not set at all but is delayed, it is possible to manage the gaming machine at all.

Feature C21. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-range result) corresponding to the game state transition, the game state is transferred to the specific game state (open/close execution mode). State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main controller 71 of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the specific device to recognize that the game state has been changed or an unrecognizable state that does not allow the recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a mode of the specific game state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of grant of a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long time mode or medium time mode) and a relatively low mode (short time mode) are set. ,
The state transition means, based on that the determination result of the transition determination means is the first determination result (for example, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B), the section that proceeds in the relatively low mode is at least from the start timing. This is to shift to a first specific game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle timing,
When shifting to the first specific game state, the recognition control means delays the timing of setting the recognition enabled state until after the timing in the middle of the section (step S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 and A game machine having a function of executing the process of step S512).

In the gaming machine with the feature C21, when the game state transition occurs, the recognition means is in the recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well. Further, since the first specific game state in which the section where the expectation level of the grant of the predetermined privilege is relatively low is generated at least halfway from the start timing is set, the predetermined privilege is granted. It is possible to use the execution of the specific game state as an effect while suppressing the influence on the rate, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, in the case of the first specific game state, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing. As a result, when the first specific game state is to be entered, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first specific game state is set as the specific game state. In, it becomes possible to favorably manage the gaming machine.

In addition, for example, when making the specific device recognize that the game state has changed, if there is a possibility that the effect of setting a plurality of types of the specific game state may be lost, the state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit what is done.

Feature C22. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-range result) corresponding to the game state transition, the game state is transferred to the specific game state (open/close execution mode). State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the management device to recognize that the game state has been transitioned, or an unrecognizable state that does not allow recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a game state to be transferred after the specific game state, a case where a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous are set,
As a game mode transition mode including a transition to the specific game state, after the specific game state, the first transition mode in which the specific element shifts to a game state in which the specific element is advantageous (for example, an explicit high-probability jackpot result A And the transition mode when the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is achieved in the high-frequency support mode) are set,
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the recognition control means is after the timing in the middle of the specific game state and before the transition to the game state after the specific game state is performed. A game machine characterized by comprising setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) at the timing of the recognizable state.

In the gaming machine with the feature C22, the recognition means is in the recognizable state when the gaming state transition occurs, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in the gaming hall where many gaming machines are installed. It will be possible. Further, as the game mode transition mode, the first transition mode in which the specific element is shifted to the game state in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific game state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, when the game state transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing of the specific game state. As a result, when the game mode transition mode becomes the first transition mode, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first transition mode is set as the game mode transition mode. With this configuration, it is possible to perform excellent gaming machine management.

In addition, for example, when the management device is made to recognize that the game state has shifted, if there is a possibility that the effect of setting multiple types of game state transitions may be lost, the state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit what is done.

The configuration newly defined in any one of the features C5 to C21 may be applied to the feature C22. In this case, there is a synergistic effect due to the application of those configurations.

Feature C23. Transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result (each jackpot result and special out-of-range result) corresponding to the game state transition, the game state is transferred to the specific game state (open/close execution mode). State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for making the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state has been changed,
Recognition control means (of the main controller 71 of the main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that allows the specific device to recognize that the game state has been changed or an unrecognizable state that does not allow the recognition. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92),
Is equipped with
As a game state to be transferred after the specific game state, a case where a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous are set,
As a game mode transition mode including a transition to the specific game state, after the specific game state, the first transition mode in which the specific element shifts to a game state in which the specific element is advantageous (for example, an explicit high-probability jackpot result A And the transition mode when the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is achieved in the high-frequency support mode) are set,
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the recognition control means is after the timing in the middle of the specific game state and before the transition to the game state after the specific game state is performed. A game machine characterized by comprising setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) at the timing of the recognizable state.

In the gaming machine with the characteristic C23, when the game state transition occurs, the recognizing means becomes the recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well. Further, as the game mode transition mode, the first transition mode in which the specific element is shifted to the game state in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific game state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, when the game state transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing of the specific game state. As a result, when the game mode transition mode becomes the first transition mode, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first transition mode is set as the game mode transition mode. With this configuration, it is possible to perform excellent gaming machine management.

In addition, for example, in the case where there is a risk that the effect of setting a plurality of types of game state transitions may be lost if the specific device is made to recognize that the game state has transitioned, the state is set to a recognizable state. It is possible to limit what is done.

The configuration newly defined in any one of the features C5 to C21 may be applied to the feature C23. In this case, there is a synergistic effect due to the application of those configurations.

The inventions relating to the above characteristic group B or characteristic group C are effective for the following problems.

For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and when the result of the lottery is a predetermined result, a transition to a gaming state such as a transition to a jackpot state is made. appear. In addition, a configuration is known in which information for causing a gaming machine management computer or the like to recognize the gaming state of the gaming machine is output so that the gaming machine can be managed in the gaming hall.

For example, by outputting a signal indicating that the gaming machine is in the jackpot state, the management computer can recognize that the gaming machine is in the jackpot state. Then, in the case of an illegal act that causes a large amount of game media to be paid out, it is indicated that a large amount of game media is being paid out even though the signal indicating that the jackpot has not been output. It becomes possible for the administrator to recognize, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent activity from being continued for a long period of time.

Further, for example, a game hall in which a counter display is arranged in parallel corresponding to each gaming machine is known. In the gaming hall, the number of transitions such as a jackpot state is displayed by a counter according to a signal output from the gaming machine. I am trying to be notified by a container. In this case, the player can refer to the content notified by the counter display to select the gaming machine in which he/she is playing a game.

Here, in a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and as one method therefor, it is conceivable to improve the mode of shifting the gaming state. However, if an attempt is made to improve the game state transition mode while using the conventional configuration as it is for the signal output to the game hall, at least one of the gaming machine management through the signal output and the improvement of the attention to the game will be described. There is concern that problems will occur.

10... Pachinko machine, 32... Variable winning device, 32a... Large winning opening, 34... Lower working opening, 41... Symbol display device, 51... Game ball launching mechanism, 71... Main control device, 72... Sound emission control device, 77 ...Payout device constituting privilege granting means, 78...Payout control device constituting privilege granting means, 81...External terminal board as recognition means, 92...MPU, 102...MPU, 111...Display control device, 236... 1 variable winning device, 236a... 1st big winning port, 237... 2nd variable winning device, 237a... 2nd big winning port.

Claims (1)

Based on the launch operation by the player, launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A variable ball entering means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball control means for executing a variable ball control for switching the variable ball ball to the closed state after the variable ball ball is opened.
A transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift the game state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Specific control setting means for setting the variable ball entrance control to a specific control state in which the variable ball entry control is performed a predetermined number of times, based on the determination result of the transition determination means corresponding to the transition of the game state. When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images